FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER 11ax RTL8852BE Combo module

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The microSD logo and microSD are trademarks of SD-3C LLC. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort and the DisplayPort logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association

(VESA) in the United States and other countries. Miracast is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: April 2022 Document Part Number: N02754-001 This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows is automatically updated, which is always enabled. High-speed internet and Microsoft account required. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com. If your product ships with Windows in S Mode: Windows in S Mode works exclusively with apps from the Microsoft Store within Windows. Certain default settings, features, and apps cannot be changed. Some accessories and apps that are compatible with Windows may not work (including some antivirus, PDF writers, driver utilities, and accessibility apps), and performance may vary, even if you switch out of S Mode. If you switch to Windows, you cannot switch back to S Mode. Learn more at Windows.com/SmodeFAQ. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii Processor configuration setting (select products only) Important information about processor configurations. IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. iv Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Getting started.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Best practices.....................................................................................................................................................................1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................................................1 2 Getting to know your computer.............................................................................................................................................3 Locating hardware .............................................................................................................................................................3 Locating software ..............................................................................................................................................................3 Right side ...........................................................................................................................................................................3 Left side .............................................................................................................................................................................4 Display................................................................................................................................................................................5 Low blue light mode (select products only) ..............................................................................................................5 Wake-on-touch (select products only) ......................................................................................................................6 Keyboard area....................................................................................................................................................................7 Touchpad settings and components .........................................................................................................................7 Touchpad settings..............................................................................................................................................7 Adjusting touchpad settings......................................................................................................................7 Turning on the touchpad............................................................................................................................7 Touchpad components ......................................................................................................................................7 Lights..........................................................................................................................................................................8 Button and fingerprint reader ...................................................................................................................................9 Special keys..............................................................................................................................................................11 Action keys ...............................................................................................................................................................12 Front ................................................................................................................................................................................14 Bottom ............................................................................................................................................................................14 Labels...............................................................................................................................................................................15 Using a SIM card (select products only)...........................................................................................................................16 Inserting a microSD card or nano SIM card..............................................................................................................16 3 Connecting to a network .....................................................................................................................................................18 Connecting to a wireless network ..................................................................................................................................18 Using the wireless controls......................................................................................................................................18 Airplane mode key ...........................................................................................................................................18 Operating system controls .............................................................................................................................18 Connecting to a WLAN..............................................................................................................................................19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ................................................................................................19 Using eSIM (select products only)............................................................................................................................20 Using GPS (select products only).............................................................................................................................20 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)........................................................................................20 Connecting Bluetooth devices .........................................................................................................................20 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ........................................................................................21 v 4 Enjoying entertainment features ........................................................................................................................................22 Using the camera .............................................................................................................................................................22 Using audio ......................................................................................................................................................................22 Connecting speakers................................................................................................................................................22 Connecting headphones ..........................................................................................................................................22 Connecting headsets ...............................................................................................................................................23 Using sound settings ...............................................................................................................................................23 Sound settings .................................................................................................................................................23 Audio settings ..................................................................................................................................................23 Using video.......................................................................................................................................................................23 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ...............................................24 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only)...................................................................25 Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI.................................................................................25 Setting up HDMI audio .....................................................................................................................................25 Turn on HDMI audio..................................................................................................................................26 Return audio to computer speakers ........................................................................................................26 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) .............................26 Using data transfer ..........................................................................................................................................................26 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ...........................................................................26 5 Navigating the screen ..........................................................................................................................................................28 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................................28 Tap............................................................................................................................................................................28 Two-finger pinch zoom............................................................................................................................................28 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................29 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad)................................................................................................29 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................29 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................30 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) .........................................................................................30 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ..................................................................................................................30 One-finger slide (touch screen) ...............................................................................................................................31 Using an optional keyboard or mouse.............................................................................................................................31 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)......................................................................................................31 6 Managing power...................................................................................................................................................................32 Using Sleep and Hibernation ...........................................................................................................................................32 Initiating and exiting Sleep ......................................................................................................................................32 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) .......................................................................................33 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ......................................................................................................................33 Using the Power icon .......................................................................................................................................................34 Running on battery power...............................................................................................................................................34 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)...........................................................................................................34 Displaying battery charge........................................................................................................................................35 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only).........................................................35 Conserving battery power .......................................................................................................................................35 Identifying low battery levels..................................................................................................................................35 vi Resolving a low battery level...................................................................................................................................36 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....................................................................36 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................................................................36 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation...................................................36 Factory-sealed battery ............................................................................................................................................36 Running on external power .............................................................................................................................................36 7 Maintaining your computer..................................................................................................................................................38 Improving performance...................................................................................................................................................38 Using Disk Defragmenter.........................................................................................................................................38 Using Disk Cleanup...................................................................................................................................................38 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ......................................................................................................38 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status...............................................................................................................39 Updating programs and drivers.......................................................................................................................................39 Updating both programs and drivers ......................................................................................................................39 Updating programs only ..........................................................................................................................................39 Updating drivers only ..............................................................................................................................................39 Cleaning your computer...................................................................................................................................................40 Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) .......................................................................................................40 Removing dirt and debris from your computer.......................................................................................................40 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ...........................................................................................................41 Caring for wood veneer (select products only) .......................................................................................................42 Traveling with or shipping your computer ......................................................................................................................42 8 Securing your computer and information ...........................................................................................................................44 Using passwords ..............................................................................................................................................................44 Setting Windows passwords....................................................................................................................................44 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ...................................................................................................................45 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ...................................................................................................................46 Using internet security software.....................................................................................................................................46 Using antivirus software..........................................................................................................................................46 Using firewall software ............................................................................................................................................46 Installing software updates.............................................................................................................................................47 Using HP TechPulse (select products only) .....................................................................................................................47 Securing your wireless network ......................................................................................................................................47 Backing up your software applications and information................................................................................................47 Using an optional security cable (select products only) .................................................................................................48 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ....................................................................................................................................................49 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................................49 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) ..........................................................................................................................................49 Determining the BIOS version .................................................................................................................................49 Preparing for a BIOS update ....................................................................................................................................50 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................................................50 Installing a BIOS update...................................................................................................................................50 vii 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................52 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) .............................................................................52 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code ............................................................52 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows...................................................................................................52 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant ..............................................52 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) ....................53 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows .............................................................................................53 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP..........................................53 Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store ......................................53 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only)........53 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows....................................................................................................54 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .........................................................................................................................54 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code....................................................................54 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .............................................................................................................54 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ....................................................................55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ...............................................................55 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) ..........55 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) .........................................................56 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .......................................................................................56 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version..................................................56 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number.................................56 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings ..........................................................................56 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering...............................................................................................................................58 Backing up information and creating recovery media ....................................................................................................58 Using Windows tools for backing up .......................................................................................................................58 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ............................58 Restoring and recovering your system............................................................................................................................58 Creating a system restore .......................................................................................................................................59 Restoring and recovery methods ............................................................................................................................59 Recovering using HP Recovery media .....................................................................................................................59 Changing the computer boot order .........................................................................................................................60 Using HP Sure Recover (select products only).........................................................................................................60 12 Electrostatic discharge ......................................................................................................................................................61 13 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................................................62 Input power......................................................................................................................................................................62 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................63 14 Accessibility .......................................................................................................................................................................64 HP and accessibility .........................................................................................................................................................64 Finding the technology tools you need ...................................................................................................................64 The HP commitment ................................................................................................................................................64 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) .............................................................................65 Finding the best assistive technology .....................................................................................................................65 Assessing your needs ......................................................................................................................................65 Accessibility for HP products ...........................................................................................................................65 viii Standards and legislation................................................................................................................................................66 Standards.................................................................................................................................................................66 Mandate 376 EN 301 549..............................................................................................................................66 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) .................................................................................................66 Legislation and regulations .....................................................................................................................................67 Useful accessibility resources and links ..........................................................................................................................67 Organizations...........................................................................................................................................................67 Educational institutions...........................................................................................................................................67 Other disability resources........................................................................................................................................68 HP links ....................................................................................................................................................................68 Contacting support ..........................................................................................................................................................68 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................69 ix 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a 58. network on page 18. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 22. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 46. Access HP Support Assistant appFor quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations or or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Safety & Comfort Guide Proper workstation setup To access this guide:

Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Getting started 1 Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource Contents Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Electrical and mechanical safety information Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Getting to know your computer Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer, right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right side Identify the components on the right side of the computer. Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2) nano SIM card slot (select products only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (nano SIM) card. microSD memory card reader (select products only) Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. For SIM card installation steps, see Using a SIM card (select products only) on page 16. To insert a card:

1. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Getting to know your computer 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(3) USB SuperSpeed 5 Gbps ports (2)

(4) AC adapter and battery light 2. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

card reader. Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory Connect a USB device, provide high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charge small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking amber: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging.

(5) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Left side Identify the components on the left side of the computer. Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description HDMI port

(1)

(2) Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. USB Type-C power connector and SuperSpeed 10 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge and DisplayPort output Connects an AC adapter that has a USB Type-C connector, supplying power to the computer and, if needed, charging the computer battery. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(3)

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Description and and Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Display The computer display can include essential components such as speakers, antennas, cameras, and microphones. Low blue light mode (select products only) Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at night or for reading. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. Display 5 Wake-on-touch (select products only) Use the wake-on-touch feature to bring the computer out of the Sleep state quickly. To wake your computer, double-tap the touchscreen. NOTE: This feature is available in stand, tent, and tablet modes, but not in clamshell mode. NOTE: This feature is not available when the computer is in Hibernation. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) WLAN antennas*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). WWAN antennas* (select products only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWANs). Internal microphones (2) Record sound. Camera Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using the camera on page 22. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello

(select products only) on page 46. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

(5) Camera light On: The camera is in use.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. NOTE: The keyboard area, including the function keys and (select products only) power key, is disabled in stand, tent, and tablet modes. To enable the keyboard, including the power key, change to the clamshell mode. Touchpad settings and components Learn the touchpad settings and components Touchpad settings Learn how to adjust touchpad settings. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 2. Choose a setting. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Using an external mouse, click the touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Identify the touchpad components. Keyboard area 7 Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. Left control zone Right control zone For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 28. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Lights Identify the lights on the computer. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-5 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Caps lock light Mute light Power light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: The computer is on. Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power saving state that uses the least amount of power. Button and fingerprint reader Identify the computer button and fingerprint reader. Button and fingerprint reader 9 Fingerprint readers, which enable a fingerprint logon, can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard. IMPORTANT: To verify that your computer supports fingerprint reader sign-in, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type Sign-in options in the search box and press enter. If Fingerprint recognition is not listed as an option, then your computer does not include a fingerprint reader. Table 2-6 Button and fingerprint reader and their descriptions Component Description

(1) Power button When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 10 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power and sleep settings:

10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-6 Button and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(2) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Swipe down across the fingerprint reader. See Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 46 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. Special keys Identify the special keys. Table 2-7 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Action keys Windows key Opens the Start menu. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with another key. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Execute frequently used system functions as defined by the icon symbols on f1 through f12 function keys. See Action keys on page 12. Special keys 11 Table 2-7 Special keys and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(5) Power button When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 10 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power and sleep settings:

Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Action keys Identify the action keys. The action keys execute frequently used system functions as defined by the icon symbols on f1 through f12. The action keys vary by computer. To use an action key, press and hold the key. NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key. Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Launches the emoji keyboard. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Opens the How to get help in Windows" webpage. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Mutes the microphone. Turns the touchpad on or off. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Action keys 13 Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Executes frequently used tasks. Some tasks might not be available on all products. Opens an application, file, or website Enters frequently used text into a permanent clipboard Ability to change system profiles Ability to change system properties Executes user-defined key sequences Front Use the illustration and table to identify the front component. Table 2-9 Front component and its description Component Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. Bottom Identify the bottom components. NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Table 2-10 Bottom components and their descriptions Component

(1) Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Table 2-10 Bottom components and their descriptions (continued) Component

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. Description NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information that you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels can be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the following examples. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Table 2-11 Service label components Component Serial number Product ID

(1)

(2)

(3) HP product name and model number Labels 15 Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Warranty period Product ID Serial number Regulatory labelsProvide regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Using a SIM card (select products only) Use these instructions to insert a SIM card. IMPORTANT: You can damage the SIM card if you insert the wrong size card or insert it or the SIM card tray in the wrong direction. The card might also become stuck in the slot. Do not use SIM card adapters. To prevent damage to the SIM card or connectors, use minimal force when inserting or removing a SIM card. Inserting a microSD card or nano SIM card To insert a microSD or nano SIM card, follow these steps. 1. 2. Turn off the computer by using the Shut down command. Position the computer display-side up on a flat surface. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3. 4. 5. Press in gently on the SIM card access tray to disengage the SIM lock, and the tray will pop out of the slot

(1). Remove the tray (2) from the computer and insert the card (3). Replace the tray in the computer. Press in gently on the tray (4) until it is firmly seated. To remove the SIM card, press in gently on the SIM card access tray to disengage the SIM lock, and the tray will pop out of the slot. Remove the SIM card. Replace the tray in the computer and press in gently on the tray until it is firmly seated. Inserting a microSD card or nano SIM card 17 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. The WLAN device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more features. Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer might have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. 1. 2. 3. Select Wi-Fi, and then select Manage known networks. Select Add network. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon. Select Network and Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select from the available options. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Connecting to a WLAN 19 For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using eSIM (select products only) Your computer might be equipped with an eSIM. An eSIM is a programmable version of the commonly used SIM that you can use to download different profiles from selected carriers. An eSIM lets you connect to the internet over a cellular data connection. With an eSIM, you do not need to get a SIM card from your mobile operator, and you can quickly switch between mobile operators and data plans. For example, you might have one cellular data plan for work and a different plan with another mobile operator for personal use. If you travel, you can connect in more places by finding mobile operators with plans in that area. You can implement eSIMs in two ways:

The eSIM chip can be embedded (eUICC). The notebook then operates as a dual SIM, one as eUICC and the second as standard micro or nano SIM card on a SIM card tray. Only one SIM can be active at a time. A removable physical eSIM is placed on a SIM card tray like a standard micro or nano SIM card, but the eSIM is not limited to a single carrier (physical blank eSIM). You must add an eSIM profile to connect to the internet using cellular data. To add a profile, manage SIM profiles, and learn how to use an eSIM, go to https://www.support.microsoft.com , and type Use an eSIM in the search bar. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer might be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, be sure location is enabled under the Location setting. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type location in the search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type bluetooth in the search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled. Select Add device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. If there is no RJ-45 (network) port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion product. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) 21 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras can be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 44 for details about using Windows Hello. On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, press the camera privacy key. The camera privacy light turns on. To turn the camera back on, press the key again. To use your camera, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type camera in the search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. NOTE: The first time you select the Camera app, you must select whether Camera can access your precise location. Using audio Connecting speakers You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To access this document:

Documentation. Connecting headsets Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Documentation. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Sound settings To view or change sound settings, follow these steps. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type audio control in the search box, and then select the audio control panel for your system. Audio settings Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. Connecting headsets 23 To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the instructions. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort (DP) device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press the Windows key + p to cycle through one of four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press the Windows key + p, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. 24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) HDMI (high-definition media interface) cables connect high-definition devices for enhanced audio and video. Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the instructions. NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. NOTE: HDMI port shape can vary by product. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press the Windows key + p to cycle through one of four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press the Windows key + p, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) 25 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Turn on HDMI audio After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following this procedure. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, select Sound settings, and then select More sound settings. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Select Set Default, and then select OK. Return audio to computer speakers Follow these steps to return the audio stream to the computer speakers. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, select Sound settings, and then select More sound settings. On the Playback tab, select Speakers. Select Set Default, and then select OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) Follow these steps to discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type connect in the search box, and then select Connect to a wireless display. Under Scale & layout, select Connect next to Connect to a wireless display. Select a setting, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 26 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) 27 Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. 5 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth &

devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the taskbar search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) 29 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth

& devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) Select products have an on-screen keyboard. 1. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. One-finger slide (touch screen) 31 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 32. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 33. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep several ways. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the touchpad (select products only). 32 Chapter 6 Managing power Double-tap the touch screen (select products only). NOTE: This feature is available in stand, tent, and tablet modes but not in clamshell mode. When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power and sleep settings. 1. 2. 3. Click the Search icon in the taskbar, type power, and then select Choose a power plan. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) 33 The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. Save your work and close all open programs. 1. 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To view power and battery settings, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power and sleep settings. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. The charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. 34 Chapter 6 Managing power To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge When you are using your computer while running on battery power only, periodically check the battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) You can access battery information in several ways. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Be sure to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the battery light and power icon indicate a low battery level. The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon on page 34. Displaying battery charge 35 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Fixes & Diagnostics, select Check your battery, and then select Launch. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. 36 Chapter 6 Managing power The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 37 7 Maintaining your computer Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. 1. 2. 1. 2. To run Disk Defragmenter:

Connect the computer to AC power. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type defragment in the search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup To run Disk Cleanup:

Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type disk in the search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions. You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. 38 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Depending on your operating system, you can use the following methods to update programs and drivers:

Updating both programs and drivers on page 39 Updating programs only on page 39 Updating drivers only on page 39 Updating both programs and drivers Use this procedure to update both programs and drivers. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Under My notebook, select Updates. The Software and Drivers window opens, and Windows checks for updates. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs only Use this procedure to update programs only. Select Start, and then select Microsoft Store. 1. 2. Updating drivers only Use this procedure to update drivers only. Select the dots next to your profile picture in the top-right corner, and then select Downloads and updates. 3. On the Downloads and updates page, select Get updates, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type windows update settings in the search box, and then select Windows Update settings. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status 39 2. Select Check for updates, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If Windows does not find a new driver, go to the device manufacturer's website, and follow the NOTE:

instructions. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you can clean all computer surfaces. 1. Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start menu, and then select HP Easy Clean. Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar. or or Select Start, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile. 2. Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 40 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 41 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 42. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 40 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 41 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 40, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 42, or both, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant 41 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal. Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois. Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone, turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents. Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time. If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth. Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood. Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood. See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 40 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 41 for sanitizing guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. 42 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer from a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 43 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. You can set several types of passwords. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. You can set additional passwords in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. NOTE:

For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Function User password Protects access to a Windows user account. 44 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions (continued) Password Function Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords BIOS passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions Password Function Administrator password Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). Power-on password Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

a. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

- or -

b. Tap f10. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 45 Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll your fingerprint, your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. If you do not have a password set up, you must add one before you can use other sign-in options. Select Password, and then select Add. Select Facial recognition (Windows Hello) or Fingerprint recognition (Windows Hello), and then select Set up. Select Get started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. HP strongly recommends that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you use the antivirus program of your choice to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software 46 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Windows Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 3. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP TechPulse (select products only) HP TechPulse is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP TechPulse helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hpdaas.com/. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Installing software updates 47 Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 48 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) You have several ways to access the Setup Utility (BIOS). IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10. or Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP HP Support Assistant Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Under My notebook, select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 49). 2. Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version. Using Setup Utility (BIOS) 49 3. Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. In Windows, press ctrl+alt+s. To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 50. Preparing for a BIOS update Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Downloading a BIOS update After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select Updates. The Checking for Updates window opens, and Windows checks for updates. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. Installing a BIOS update BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type file in the search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 50 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Installing a BIOS update 51 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, a firmware feature. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 53. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated for select component tests. For interactive tests, such as keyboard, mouse, or audio and video palette, you must perform troubleshooting steps before you can receive a failure ID. You have several options after you receive a failure ID:

Select Next to open the Event Automation Service (EAS) page, where you can log the case. Scan the QR code with your mobile device, which takes you to the EAS page, where you can log the or case. or Select the box next to the 24-digit failure ID to copy your failure code and send it to support. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Support Assistant or the Start menu. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support Assistant. 1. Select the Search icon in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 52 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Select Fixes & Diagnostics. Select Run hardware diagnostics, and then select Launch. 4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu. Select the Start button, and then select All apps. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select the specific Windows diagnostics version to download to your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store. Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop or select the Search icon in the taskbar, and then type Microsoft Store in the search box. Type HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen directions. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) 53 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. For some products, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create NOTE:

the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 55. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the failure ID code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 54 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 55. b. c. Hard drive BIOS the on-screen instructions. 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive 55 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. NOTE:

number. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several customizations. Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 56 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 2. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Exit, then select Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings 57 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB flash drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For details:

Go to http://www.hp.com, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that matches the type of computer that you have. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 59 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. 58 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 59. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. Run a Microsoft System Restore. 1. 2. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before you recycle it. 3. Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media on page 59. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. Recovering using HP Recovery media You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 58. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 59 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Creating a system restore 59 Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. button, and then select f9. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed recovery software. Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

Latest version of the operating system Platform-specific device drivers Software applications, in the case of a custom image To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation. 60 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Electrostatic discharge 61 13 Specifications Input power When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 13-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 2.5 A / 15 V dc @2 A 30 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc

@ 5 A / 5 V dc USB-A port @ 2 A 100 W USB-C + 10 W USB-A 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 62 Chapter 13 Specifications Table 13-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W 20 V dc @ 14 A 280 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 13-2 Operating environment specifications Metric U.S. Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 5C to 35C 20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F 4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 63 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 65. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. in an accessible form. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable and available in your country or region, that are included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select Office of Aging and Accessibility. HP computers: For Windows products, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the appropriate operating system in the results. HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select Monitors or Accessories. If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 68. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) 65 Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows and Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) navigability) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) 66 Chapter 14 Accessibility Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Australia Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age related limitations. California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Legislation and regulations 67 Other disability resources Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program ILO Global Business and Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable HP links HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. 68 Chapter 14 Accessibility Index A B AC adapter and battery light, identifying 4 accessibility 64, 65, 67, 68 accessibility needs assessment 65 action key, identifying 11 action keys airplane mode 13 decrease screen brightness 13 help 13 identifying 12 increase screen brightness 13 keyboard backlight 13 mute microphone 13 mute volume 13 next track 13 pause 13 play 13 previous track 13 privacy screen 12 speaker volume 13 switch screen image 13 touchpad 13 using 12 volume mute 13 airplane mode 18 airplane mode key 13, 18 antivirus software, using 46 assistive technology (AT) AT (assistive technology) finding 65 purpose 64 finding 65 purpose 64 audio 22 adjusting volume 13 HDMI audio 25, 26 headphones 22 headsets 23 sound settings 23 speakers 22 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 backing up software and information 47 backup, creating 58 backups 58 battery conserving power 35 discharging 35 factory-sealed 36 finding information 35 low battery levels 35 resolving low battery level 36 battery charge 35 battery information, finding 35 battery power 34 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 49 downloading an update 50 starting the Setup Utility 49 updating 49 Bluetooth device 18, 20 Bluetooth label 15 boot order, changing 60 bottom components 14 buttons left touchpad 7 power 10, 12 right touchpad 7 C camera identifying 6 using 22 camera light, identifying 6 camera privacy key, using 22 caps lock light 9 caring for your computer 40 cleaning your computer 40 caring for wood veneer 42 disinfecting 41 HP Easy Clean 40 removing dirt and debris 40 components bottom 14 display 5, 6 keyboard area 7 left side 4 lights 8 rear 14 right side 3 touchpad 7 connecting to a network 18 connecting to a wireless network 18 connecting to a WLAN 19 connecting to LAN 21 connectors power 4 control zone 7 corporate WLAN connection 19 critical battery level 35 customer support, accessibility 68 data transfer 26 decrease screen brightness action key 13 Disk Cleanup software 38 Disk Defragmenter software 38 display components 5, 6 display states 24, 25 electrostatic discharge 61 esc key, identifying 11 eSIM 20 external power, using 36 factory-sealed battery 36 fingerprint reader 11 fingerprints, registering 46 firewall software 46 fn key, identifying 11 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 30 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 30 D E F G gestures 28 Get Help in Windows action key 13 GPS 20 Index 69 H hardware, locating 3 HDMI port connecting 25 identifying 4 headphones, connecting 22 headsets, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 33 initiated during critical battery jacks J K audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5 mute volume action key 13 nano SIM card, inserting 16 navigating the screen 28 next track action key 13 keyboard and optional mouse using 31 keyboard backlight action key 13 keys on-screen keyboard 31 one-finger slide touch screen N O P gesture 31 operating environment 63 operating system controls 18 passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 45 Windows 44 pause action key 13 play action key 13 ports HDMI 4, 25 USB SuperSpeed 5 Gbps 4 USB Type-C 26 USB Type-C power connector and SuperSpeed 10 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge and DisplayPort output 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector 24 power battery 34 external 36 power button, identifying 10, 12 power connector identifying 4 Power icon, using 34 power light, identifying 9 power settings, using 34 precision touchpad using 28 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 30 four-finger tap 30 three-finger swipe 30 three-finger tap 29 two-finger slide 29 two-finger tap 29 previous track action key 13 privacy screen action key 12 product name and number, computer 15 public WLAN connection 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI level 35 initiating 33 high-definition devices, connecting 25, 26 HP 3D DriveGuard 38 HP Assistive Policy 64 HP Fast Charge 34 HP Mobile Broadband activating 19 IMEI number 19 MEID number 19 downloading 55 failure ID code 54 starting 54 using 54 Windows accessing 52, 53 downloading 53 failure ID code 52 installing 54 using 52 HP Recovery media recovery 59 HP resources 1 HP Sure Recover 60 HP TechPulse 47 I HP PC Hardware Diagnostics IMEI number 19 increase screen brightness action key 13 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 32 input power 62 installing optional security cable 48 internal microphones, identifying 6 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 65 internet security software, using 46 70 Index action 11 airplane mode 13 esc 11 fn 11 touchpad 13 Windows 11 L labels Bluetooth 15 regulatory 15 serial number 15 service 15 wireless certification 15 WLAN 15 left control zone, identifying 7, 8 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 4 camera 6 caps lock 9 mute 9 power 9 touchpad 7 low battery level 35 low blue light mode 5 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 38 Disk Defragmenter 38 updating programs and drivers 39 managing power 32 MEID number 19 microSD card, inserting 16 Miracast 26 mobile broadband activating 19 IMEI number 19 MEID number 19 mute light, identifying 9 mute microphone action key 13 R recovery 58 discs 59 media 59 USB flash drive 59 recovery media 58 creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 58 creating using Windows tools 58 regulatory information regulatory label 15 wireless certification labels 15 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings customizing 56 using 56 resources, accessibility 67 restoring 58 restoring and recovery methods 59 right control zone, identifying 7, 8 right side components 3 S screen navigating 28 Section 508 accessibility standards 66 security cable, installing 48 serial number, computer 15 service labels, locating 15 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 45 shipping the computer 42 shutdown 33 SIM card, inserting 16 SIM slot, identifying 3 Sleep exiting 32 initiating 32 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 32 slots memory card reader 3 microSD memory card reader 3 nano SIM card 3 software Disk Cleanup 38 Disk Defragmenter 38 locating 3 software installed locating 3 software updates, installing 47 sound See audio gesture 28 gesture 30 three-finger swipe touchpad mouse 31 using the touchpad 28 sound settings, using 23 speaker volume action keys 13 speakers 14 connecting 22 special keys identifying 11 using 11 specifications 62 standards and legislation, accessibility 66 SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector connecting USB Type-C 24 switch screen image action key 13 system restore 59 system restore point, creating 58 T tap touchpad and touch screen three-finger tap touchpad gesture 29 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 31 slide 31 tap 28 two-finger pinch zoom 28 touchpad settings 7 using 28 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 28 two-finger pinch zoom 28 touchpad buttons identifying 7 touchpad components 7 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 30 four-finger tap 30 three-finger swipe 30 three-finger tap 29 two-finger slide 29 two-finger tap 29 touchpad key 13 touchpad light, identifying 7 touchpad settings, adjusting 7 touchpad zone, identifying 7, 8 transfer data 26 traveling with the computer 15, 42 turning off the computer 33 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 28 U V W two-finger slide touchpad gesture 29 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 29 unresponsive system 33 updating drivers 39 updating programs 39 updating programs and drivers 39 USB SuperSpeed 5 Gbps port, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 24, 26 USB Type-C power connector and SuperSpeed 10 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge and DisplayPort output, identifying 4 using passwords 44 using the keyboard and optional vent, identifying 15 vents, identifying 5, 14 video DisplayPort device 24 HDMI port 25 USB Type-C 26 wireless displays 26 video, using 23 volume adjusting 13 wake-on-touch 6 Windows backup 58 recovery media 58 system restore point 58 Windows Hello 22 using 46 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows passwords 44 Windows tools, using 58 wired network (LAN) 21 wireless antennas, identifying 6 wireless button 18 wireless certification label 15 wireless controls button 18 operating system 18 Index 71 wireless light 18 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 19 corporate WLAN connection 19 functional range 19 public WLAN connection 19 wireless network, securing 47 WLAN antennas, identifying 6 WLAN device 15 WLAN label 15 WWAN antennas, identifying 6 WWAN device 19 72 Index

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20182020 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Sixth Edition: March 2020 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-006 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 4 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 5 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 5 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 6 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 8

......................................................................................................................................... 8 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 9 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 v U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 10 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 11 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 11 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 12 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 12 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 15 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 16 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 16 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 16 China ................................................................................................................................ 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 17 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 18 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20 vi Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 21 Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21

....................................................................................................................... 21 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 24 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 28

................................................... 28

............................................................................................................................................... 29

(RoHS) ..................................................... 31

....................................................................................................... 31

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 32

....................................................................................................... 32 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 33 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 33 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 33 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 33 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 34 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 37 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) Belarus regulatory notice 3 The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for IMPORTANT:

indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. IMPORTANT:

excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix. Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) RFID; 865-868 MHz/915-921 MHz 2000/4000 WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Australia and New Zealand notice 5 Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 VCCI-B B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico Singapore wireless notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. South Korea notices 7 Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Factory-sealed battery notices 9 Modem notices U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

Modem notices 11 a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power IMPORTANT:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. Important safety information 13 This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Battery notices Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Fan notices 15 Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices China For use in Norway CCC Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 DC plug of external HP power supply Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Travel notice 19 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m Icon Description 2000m China tropical warning notice Icon Description 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner 21 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Taiwan battery recycling information Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can Taiwan battery recycling information 23 Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances Mercury statement HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply 25 Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU 1. 2. 1. 2. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China PC energy label 27 China RoHS

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS USB USB

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS 30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.

(RoHS) 31 http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 33 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. TCO Certified 35 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Symbols/Numerics notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 Index 31, 32 31, 32 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 20 B battery 14 battery notice 8, 9, 22 battery recycling 22 Belarus regulatory notice 3 Brazil notice 3, 16 C cable grounding notice 21 Canada modem statement 11 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 25 China PC energy label 25 D disposal notices battery 22 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 22 factory sealed battery 9 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 22 ENERGY STAR certification 23 environmental notices 22 equipment disposal notice 22 ergonomics notice 4, 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 33 G GS Notice 4, 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 15 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 33 J Japan modem statement 11 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 33 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 15 Belarus regulatory 3 Brazil 3, 16 Canada 3 environmental 22 equipment disposal 22 ergonomics 4, 5 fan 15 headset and earphone volume level 15 India restriction of hazardous substances 33 Japan 6 Japan power cord 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 33 laser safety 9, 15 Macrovision Corporation 12 Mexico 6 modem 10 perchlorate material 25 power cords 17 Singapore 6 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 19 M Macrovision Corporation notice 12 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 10 modem statements notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 17 Canada 11 Japan 11 New Zealand 11 U.S. 10 modifications, notebook computers battery 22 Federal Communications Commission 2 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and S Singapore wireless notice 6 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8 TCO Certified Certification 35 Index 37 F fan notice 15 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 N New Zealand modem statement 11 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 9, 14, 22 TCO Certified Edge Certification 36 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 19 tropical warning notice 20 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 21 U U.S. modem statement 10 V voice support 12 volume level notice, headset and earphone 15 W wireless LAN devices 2 38 Index

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. Copyright 20182021 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. WiGig is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Eighth Edition: April 2021 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-008 About this guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About this guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union and UK regulatory notices .......................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 LAN 802.11 //: ......................................................................... 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 10 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 10 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 11 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 11 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 China ................................................................................................................................ 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 20 Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21 vi

....................................................................................................................... 21 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 29

................................................... 29

............................................................................................................................................... 30

(RoHS) ..................................................... 32

....................................................................................................... 32

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 33

....................................................................................................... 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 34 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 34 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 35 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 35 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 35 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 38 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and 1 used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Para maiores informaes, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union and UK regulatory notices The European Union and UK have their own set of regulatory notices. Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking and UK marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and UK and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives and the equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Brazil notice 3 The full EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters: Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) Use this notice when you need to provide EMF data for radio operation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) Some products in some countries have restrictions on radio function. IMPORTANT:

IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) The table shows radio frequency bands and maximum power levels for some products and some countries. Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 5G NR (450 MHz7125 MHz) 100 10 100 200 400 RFID; 865-868 MHz/915-921 MHz 2000/4000 WWAN 5G NR (24250 MHz52600 MHz) 316.230 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) (continued) Radio Technology Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Ergonomics notice 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Please pay attention when installing a dedicated Tower, Micro Tower Business Desktop PC or Workstation that is not intended to be installed/used in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid annoying reflections at visual display workplaces, this device must not be placed in the direct field of view. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 B VCCI-B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Aviso sobre conexiones inalmbricas para Mxico:

En el caso de PC de escritorio, equipos All-in-One, terminales de punto de venta, thin clients y workstations en uso normal e instalados con un dispositivo de transmisin y recepcin de radio, una distancia de separacin de 20 cm garantiza que los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia cumplan con los requisitos de Mxico. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices The following notices apply to Taiwan. Singapore wireless notice 7 LAN 802.11 //:

Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance Use this notice to warn of possible radiation exposure from incorrect laser usage. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices U.S. modem statements Canada, Japan, New Zealand, and the U.S. have their own sets of modem notices. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Macrovision Corporation notice 11 Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Your product documentation might require one or more of these safety notices. Important safety information These notices could apply to many products. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Important safety information 13 IMPORTANT:

If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice Use this notice if injury from excessive heat is a possibility. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice Use this notice to warn users about the possibility that a failure was not safe and controlled. If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Use this notice when the sound pressure level might be lower than recommended or expected. Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. One or more of these safety notices might apply to your product's battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Acoustics notice Battery notices 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Table 2-1 Battery disposal icon and description Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices Use one or more of these notices to warn users about the dangers of injuries from spinning fan blades. WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice This notice warns about the danger of high volume settings for headsets and earphones. Fan notices 15 WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Different countries have different requirements for power supplies and power cords. Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. China For use in Norway CCC Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements One or more of these notices might apply to your product's power cord. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply The diagram illustrates the DC plug of external HP power supply. Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard Use this notice to warn about the possibility of pinching injuries. WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection Several safety notices might apply to TV antenna connectors. External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice Use this notice to warn about the possibility of serious injury from voltage converter kits. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Travel notice 19 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m 2000m China tropical warning notice Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner Norway and Sweden require a galvanic isolator for grounding. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice This eyesight notice applies to products in Taiwan.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Taiwan eyesight notice 21 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Use this notice to explain the icon associated with waste disposal. Table 3-1 Disposal of waste equipment icon and its description Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Brazil hardware recycling information No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Taiwan battery recycling information This notice provides the regulations for battery manufacture and recycling in Taiwan. Table 3-2 Taiwan battery recycling icon and its description Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Taiwan battery recycling information 23 Table 3-3 Preset power management features when the computer is operating on AC power Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label China requires this notice of energy efficiency. In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 25 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Table 3-4 Typical Energy Consumption (TEC) values Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Category D Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China RoHS China uses the following notices for RoHS. Table 3-6

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29 Table 3-6 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

/Java USB USB SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Table 3-7

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 China RoHS 31 Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS

(Cr(VI))

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory

(RoHS) 33 Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016."

It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 The European Union requires this notice about power consumption. To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices IT ECO declarations Use these links to provide locations for IT ECO declarations. http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Notebook or tablet PCs Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. IT ECO declarations 35 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified Edge 37 Index Symbols/Numerics 32, 33 32, 33 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 20 Aviso para o Brasil 3 avisos Brasil 3 B battery 14 battery notice 8, 22 battery recycling 22 Belarus regulatory notice 2 Brazil notice 3, 16 C cable grounding notice 20 Canada modem statement 10 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 25 China PC energy label 25 D disposal notices battery 22 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 22 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 22 ENERGY STAR certification 23 environmental notices 22 equipment disposal notice 22 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 34 38 Index F fan notice 15 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 15 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 J Japan modem statement 10 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 35 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 8, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 11 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 10 Japan 10 New Zealand 11 U.S. 9 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 11 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 14, 22 Belarus regulatory 2 Brazil 3, 16 Canada 3 environmental 22 equipment disposal 22 ergonomics 5 fan 15 headset and earphone volume level 15 India restriction of hazardous substances 34 Japan 6 Japan power cord 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 35 laser safety 8, 16 Macrovision Corporation 11 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 7 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 19 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 22 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 7 TCO Certified Certification 35 TCO Certified Edge Certification 36 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 19 tropical warning notice 20 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 20 U U.S. modem statement 9 V voice support 11 volume level notice, headset and earphone 15 W wireless LAN devices 2 Index 39

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par HP Inc. ENERGY STAR et la marque de ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes aux tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose d'Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Premire dition : mars 2018 Rfrence du document : L25269-051 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. Pour accder aux derniers manuels de l'utilisateur ou guides concernant votre produit, rendez-vous sur http://www.hp.com/support. Slectionnez Recherche de votre produit, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs AVERTISSEMENT !

graves. ATTENTION :

informations qu'il contient. Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les REMARQUE :

Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ..................................................................... 1 Accs aux tiquettes de conformit ...................................................................................................................... 1 Avis de la FCC .......................................................................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cbles .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP ..................................... 3 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................................... 3 Avis pour le Canada ................................................................................................................................................ 3 Avis pour l'Union europenne ................................................................................................................................ 4 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................................. 4 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio ......................................................................... 5 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ...................................................................................................................... 5 Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) ...................................................................................................................... 5 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ............................ 5 Avis sur l'ergonomie .......................................................................................................... 6 Allemagne (texte en franais) ........................................................................ 6 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ...................................................................... 6 Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande .......................................................................................................... 6 Avis WWAN pour la Chine ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Avis pour le Japon .................................................................................................................................................. 7 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth ......................................... 7 Avis pour le Mexique .............................................................................................................................................. 7 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour ....................................................................................................... 8 Avis pour la Core du Sud ...................................................................................................................................... 8 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ........................................................................................ 8 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan .................................................................................................................................... 8 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ............................................................................................................. 8 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte .......... 9 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................................... 9 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................................. 9 Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine ................................................................................................................. 9 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................................. 10 Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 10 Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication .................................................................. 11 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 12 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 14 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 14 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 15 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 15 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 16 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ........................................................................... 16 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................................. 16 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ......................................................................................................................... 16 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-

en-un et les terminaux de point de vente .......................................................................................................... 17 Accs aux tiquettes de conformit .................................................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications ............................................................ 18 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 20 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 20 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 20 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 21 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ........................................................................................................... 21 Avis de la FCC ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 22 Cbles .............................................................................................................................. 22 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................................. 22 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................................. 22 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 22 Avis pour le Canada ........................................................................................................................... 23 Avis pour l'Union europenne ........................................................................................................... 23 Dclaration de conformit .............................................................................................. 23 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (EMF) ........................................... 24 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ................................................................................... 24 Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale

(certains produits uniquement) ................................................................... 24 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) .......................... 24 Avis sur l'ergonomie ........................................................................................................ 25 Allemagne ..................................................................................................... 25 Allemagne (texte en allemand) .................................................................... 25 Avis pour le Japon .............................................................................................................................. 25 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ......................................................... 25 vi Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ................................... 26 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................................... 27 Avis pour la Core du Sud .................................................................................................................. 27 Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ............................................................ 27 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan ................................................................................................................ 27 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ......................................................................................... 27 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte .................................................................................................................. 28 Informations sur les dplacements ariens ........................................................................................................ 28 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ........................................................................................... 28 Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine ............................................................................................................... 28 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................................. 29 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ............................................................................ 30 Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur ............................................................................................................. 30 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit ................................................................................................................... 30 Avis relatif aux batteries ...................................................................................................................................... 30 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 31 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 31 Nettoyage du clavier ............................................................................................................................................ 32 Avis sur les dplacements ................................................................................................................................... 32 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 32 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 32 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 32 Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ....................... 32

......................................................................................................................................... 32 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente ................................................................................................................... 33 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ............................................................................................... 33 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Avis relatif aux batteries ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Avis sur le ventilateur .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 35 Scurit des lasers ............................................................................................................................................... 35 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ........................................................... 36 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................................ 36 Avis pour le Brsil ............................................................................................................ 36 Danemark ........................................................................................................................ 36 Finlande ........................................................................................................................... 36 vii 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes ................................................................ 41 Norvge ........................................................................................................................... 36 Sude .............................................................................................................................. 36 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation ...................................................................................... 36 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ..................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation .................................................................................. 37 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon .................................................................... 37 Risque de pincement ........................................................................................................................................... 37 Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV ....................................................................................................... 37 Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe ......................................................................... 37 Protection contre la foudre ............................................................................................................... 38 Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble .................................... 38 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 39 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 39 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 39 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne ..................................................................................................................... 40 Norvge et Sude : Avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips dune carte TV ..................... 40

......................................................................................................................................... 40 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 41 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 41 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 41 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 42 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 42 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 43 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 43 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 44 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ......................................................... 47 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 47

........................................................................................... 48

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 49

....................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 51 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 51 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 51

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 51 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 52 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 52 Certifi TCO ........................................................................................................................................................... 53 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 54 viii 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente .............................................................................. 55 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 55 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 55 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 55 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 56 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 56 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 57 Avis sur le mercure .............................................................................................................................................. 57 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 57 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 58 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 58 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) ....................................................... 61 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 61

........................................................................................... 62

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................... 64

....................................................................................................... 64 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 65 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 65 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 65 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 65 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 66 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 66 Certifi TCO ........................................................................................................................................................... 67 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 68 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 69 ix x 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs appareils sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer bord des avions, dans les hpitaux, dans les lieux proximit d'explosifs, dans les environnements dangereux, etc. Si vous ne connaissez pas la politique relative l'utilisation de ce produit, demandez l'autorisation de l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit Les tiquettes de conformit, qui fournissent des informations sur les rglementations de votre pays ou rgion (par exemple, l'ID FCC), peuvent tre situes physiquement sous l'ordinateur, l'intrieur du compartiment de la batterie (certains modles), sous le cache de service amovible (certains modles), l'arrire de l'cran ou sur le module du modem ou de l'appareil sans fil. Certains produits peuvent galement fournir des tiquettes de rglementation lectroniques (e-tiquettes) accessibles via le systme BIOS. REMARQUE :

Les tiquettes lectroniques ne sont pas disponibles sur tous les produits. REMARQUE :

possdent peut-tre pas d'ID FCC. Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne Pour afficher les tiquettes de conformit lectroniques :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le. Appuyez sur chap ou F10 pour accder Computer Setup. l'aide d'un priphrique de pointage ou des touches de direction, slectionnez Advanced (Avanc), Electronic Labels (tiquettes de conformit), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Pour afficher une tiquette lectronique, utilisez un priphrique de pointage ou les touches de direction pour slectionner un des lments de la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. REMARQUE :

d'ordinateur et des priphriques installs. La liste des lments d'tiquette lectronique disponibles varie en fonction du modle 5. Pour quitter les menus de Computer Setup sans effectuer de modification :

Slectionnez l'icne Exit (Quitter) dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. 2. 3. 4. ou Utilisez les touches de direction pour slectionner Main (Principal), Ignore Changes and Exit (Ignorer les modifications et quitter), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit 1 Avis de la FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si cet quipement entrane des interfrences en matire de rception radio ou tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en teignant et en rallumant l'quipement, il est recommand l'utilisateur d'essayer de corriger les interfrences en suivant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne de rception. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil votre revendeur ou un technicien radio ou tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. 1. 2. Pour toute question concernant ce produit :

crivez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Appelez HP au 650-857-1501 ou Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. Modifications Cbles La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP Cet appareil ne doit pas tre plac ct ou fonctionner avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si cet appareil est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. Avis pour le Brsil 3 AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, n ou ac, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce ATTENTION :

matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant le marquage CE ont t conus de faon pouvoir fonctionner au moins dans un pays membre de lUE et sont conformes une ou plusieurs des directives de lUE suivantes, le cas chant :

RED 2014/53/EU ; Directive relative la basse tension 2014/35/EU ; Directive EMC 2014/30/EU ; Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (recherchez le nom de modle du produit ou son numro de modle rglementaire (RMN), qui est indiqu sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio Ce produit intgre un appareil de transmission et de rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard d'un ordinateur portable, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes de l'UE. Les produits conus pour une utilisation en de de cette distance, tels que les tablettes, respectent la conformit aux normes de l'UE applicables dans les positions de fonctionnement standard. Les produits peuvent tre utiliss sans garder une distance de sparation, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions spcifiques au produit. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ATTENTION : le LAN sans fil IEEE 802,11x avec une bande de frquence de 5,15 5,35 GHz est limit une utilisation intrieure uniquement dans l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Lutilisation de cette application WLAN en extrieur peut engendrer des problmes dinterfrences avec les services radio existants. ATTENTION : les installations fixes en extrieur pour l'application WiGig (bande de frquences de 57 66 GHz) sont exclues pour l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) Puissance maximale de transmission PIRE (mW) Technologie Radio Bluetooth ; 2,4 GHz NFC ; 13,56 MHz RFID ; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE ; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS ; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad ; 60 GHz Moins de 1 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Qi de chargement sans fil ; De 110 kHz 205 kHz Moins de 1 REMARQUE : Utiliser uniquement les pilotes logiciels compatibles HP et corriger les paramtres rgionaux pour assurer la conformit. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive applicable et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la Avis pour l'Union europenne 5 russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis WWAN pour la Chine 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis pour le Japon V 2 VCCI32 1 5GHz Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section.

(e ) e Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. El nmero de modelo reglamentario de este producto est en la etiqueta normativa. Si votre produit est fourni avec des accessoires sans fil, tels qu'un clavier ou une souris, et si vous devez identifier le modle de l'accessoire, reportez-vous l'tiquette appose sur cet accessoire. Le numro de modle rglementaire de ce produit se trouve sur l'tiquette rglementaire. Avis pour le Japon 7 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension tout appareil rseau large bande sans fil (WWAN) lorsque vous tes bord d'un avion. L'utilisation de tels appareils bord d'un avion est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et peut perturber le rseau cellulaire. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande

(Cet quipement de tlcommunication se conforme aux exigences NBTC.) Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'appareils lectroniques bord des avions de ligne est laisse l'apprciation de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine La ou les batteries de ce produit ne peuvent pas tre facilement remplaces par les utilisateurs. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la batterie pourrait affecter votre droit la garantie. Si une batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez le support. Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries. Avis sur les utilisations en vol 9 Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seuls les mainteneurs agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, de choc lectrique et de blessure lors de l'utilisation de ce priphrique, suivez systmatiquement les consignes de scurit de base, notamment :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau (RJ-45). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de cet ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont les marques d'homologation apparaissent sur l'tiquette de produit situe sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit pour vous assurer que celui-ci est configur pour le pays ou rgion dans lequel ou laquelle il se trouve. La slection d'un pays ou d'une rgion autre que celui ou celle o se trouve le produit peut entraner une configuration du modem en violation des lois sur les tlcommunications de ce pays ou de cette rgion. De plus, il est possible que le modem ne fonctionne pas correctement si vous n'avez pas slectionn correctement le pays/la rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que votre pays ou rgion n'est pas pris en charge, cela signifie que le modem n'a pas t homologu dans ce pays ou cette rgion et qu'il ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems 11 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Ce matriel est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette est appose sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Elle inclut, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous y invite. Certification applicable de la prise USOC = RJ11C. La fiche et la prise utilises pour connecter ce matriel au cblage des locaux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une fiche modulaire conformes sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils sont conus pour tre connects une prise modulable galement conforme. Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation pour plus d'informations. Le REN est utilis pour dterminer le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne tlphonique. Si la ligne tlphonique regroupe un nombre trop important de REN, les priphriques peuvent ne pas sonner lors d'un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des emplacements, la somme des REN ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour connatre avec certitude le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne, et donc le nombre total de REN, contactez votre compagnie tlphonique. Pour les produits homologus aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur de produit dont le format est US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs, le REN est indiqu sparment sur l'tiquette. Si ce matriel HP dgrade le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique vous avertira l'avance qu'une interruption du service peut tre requise. S'il n'est pas possible de vous informer de cette interruption l'avance, la compagnie vous avertira au plus vite. En outre, vous serez inform de votre droit dposer une rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous pensez que cela n'est ncessaire. La compagnie tlphonique peut apporter des modifications ses installations, quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement du matriel. Dans ce cas, il vous en informera l'avance afin que vous puissiez prendre les mesures ncessaires pour assurer un service tlphonique ininterrompu. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. La connexion des lignes partages est soumise des taxes dpendant de chaque tat. Pour plus d'informations, contactez la commission des services publics ou la commission des entreprises. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de ce matriel HP ne le dsactive pas. Pour toute question concernant les quipements susceptibles de dsactiver votre alarme, consultez votre compagnie tlphonique ou un installateur qualifi. Le Telephone Consumer Protection Act de 1991 rend illgal le fait d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris un tlcopieur, pour envoyer des messages ne contenant pas clairement, dans une marge situe dans la partie suprieure ou infrieure de chaque page transmise ou sur la premire page de chaque transmission, la date et l'heure de l'envoi, ainsi que des lments identifiant l'entreprise, l'entit ou la personne l'origine du message, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entreprise, de l'entit ou de la personne. (Le numro de tlphone fourni ne peut pas tre un numro en 900 ou tout autre numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance.) Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, vous devez suivre la procdure dcrite dans les instructions du logiciel de tlcopie. 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous la dclaration suivante du fournisseur du modem concernant le priphrique de modem install dans votre ordinateur :

Avis sur les modems 13 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si l'ordinateur ne possde pas la marque de certification des priphriques japonais sur sa partie infrieure, reportez-vous la marque de certification approprie ci-dessous. La marque de certification des priphriques japonais pour le modem tlcopie/donnes V.92 56K est illustre ci-dessous :

14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et ne signifie pas non plus qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge de celle-ci par la ligne. L'utilisation de la composition impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. b. c. d. Chaque appel manuel ne dpassera pas 10 tentatives d'appel au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes. Le matriel doit rester l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 30 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont passs divers numros, le matriel doit tre configur pour passer l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 5 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation soit au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les modems 15 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type d'intensit figurant sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,0 m (3,2 pieds) et 2 m (6,56 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. 16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-

un et les terminaux de point de vente Accs aux tiquettes de conformit Les tiquettes de conformit, qui fournissent des informations sur les rglementations de votre pays ou rgion (par exemple, l'ID FCC), peuvent tre situes physiquement sous l'ordinateur, l'intrieur du compartiment de la batterie, sous le cache de service amovible, l'arrire de l'cran ou sur le module du modem ou de l'appareil sans fil. Certains produits peuvent galement fournir des tiquettes de rglementation lectroniques (e-tiquettes) accessibles via le systme BIOS. REMARQUE :

Les tiquettes lectroniques ne sont pas disponibles sur tous les produits. REMARQUE :

possdent peut-tre pas d'ID FCC. Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne Pour afficher les tiquettes de conformit lectroniques :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le. Appuyez sur chap ou F10 pour accder Computer Setup. l'aide d'un priphrique de pointage ou des touches de direction, slectionnez Advanced (Avanc), Electronic Labels (tiquettes de conformit), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Pour afficher une tiquette lectronique, utilisez un priphrique de pointage ou les touches de direction pour slectionner un des lments de la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. REMARQUE :

d'ordinateur et des priphriques installs. La liste des lments d'tiquette lectronique disponibles varie en fonction du modle 5. Pour quitter les menus de Computer Setup sans effectuer de modification :

Slectionnez l'icne Exit (Quitter) dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. 2. 3. 4. ou Utilisez les touches de direction pour slectionner Main (Principal), Ignore Changes and Exit (Ignorer les modifications et quitter), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit 17 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications Le priphrique de tlcommunications de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunications du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 18 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain :

AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge permanente de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si de tels problmes apparaissent, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de rparation de Telecom. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. L'quipement associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. b. c. d. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. L'quipement doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi Privacy Act 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-

tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs appareils sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer bord des avions, dans les hpitaux, dans les lieux proximit d'explosifs, dans les environnements dangereux, etc. Si vous ne connaissez pas la politique relative l'utilisation de ce produit, demandez l'autorisation de l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur une prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. 1. 2. Pour toute question concernant ce produit :

crivez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 21 Palo Alto, CA 94304 Appelez HP au 650-857-1501 ou Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP Inc., peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Modifications Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie L'ordinateur doit tre connect au rseau de tlcommunications par un cble rpondant aux critres de la norme AS/CA S008. AVERTISSEMENT !

pas tre installs dans un autre priphrique. Les modems sans connecteur RJ11 intgral qui sont livrs avec cet ordinateur ne doivent Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm (8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, n ou ac, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce ATTENTION :

matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant le marquage CE ont t conus de faon pouvoir fonctionner au moins dans un pays membre de lUE et sont conformes une ou plusieurs des directives de lUE suivantes, le cas chant :

RED 2014/53/EU ; Directive relative la basse tension 2014/35/EU ; Directive EMC 2014/30/EU ; Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (recherchez le nom de modle du produit ou son numro de modle rglementaire (RMN), qui est indiqu sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. Envoyez un courrier lectronique techregshelp@hp.com Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (EMF) Ce produit intgre un appareil de transmission et de rception radiolectrique. Pour l'utilisation normale d'ordinateurs, une distance de 20 cm garantit des niveaux d'exposition aux frquences radio conformes aux exigences de l'UE. Les produits conus pour une utilisation en de de cette distance, tels que les tablettes, respectent la conformit aux normes de l'UE applicables dans les positions de fonctionnement standard. Les produits peuvent tre utiliss sans garder une distance de sparation, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions spcifiques au produit. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio (certains produits uniquement) ATTENTION : le LAN sans fil IEEE 802,11x avec une bande de frquence de 5,15 5,35 GHz est limit une utilisation intrieure uniquement dans l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Lutilisation de cette application WLAN en extrieur peut engendrer des problmes dinterfrences avec les services radio existants. ATTENTION : les installations fixes en extrieur pour l'application WiGig (bande de frquences de 57 66 GHz) sont exclues pour l'ensemble des pays lists dans la matrice. Bandes de frquences radio et niveaux de puissance maximale (certains produits uniquement) Puissance maximale de transmission PIRE (mW) Technologie Radio Bluetooth ; 2,4 GHz NFC ; 13,56 MHz RFID ; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz Wireless HD (USB sans fil) 60 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11 x ; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x ; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE ; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS ; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE ; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad ; 60 GHz Moins de 1 Moins de 10000 100 10 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 Qi de chargement sans fil ; De 110kHz 205 kHz Moins de 1 REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement les pilotes logiciels compatibles HP et corrigez les paramtres rgionaux pour assurer la conformit. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive applicable et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Un systme informatique compos de produits de la marque HP respecte les exigences applicables relatives l'ergonomie si tous les produits inclus concerns portent la marque de conformit GS , par exemple un ordinateur de bureau professionnel, un clavier, une souris et un moniteur. Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne Allemagne (texte en allemand) Avis pour le Japon V 2 VCCI32 1 5GHz Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section.

(e ) e 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico Avis pour la Core du Sud La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande

(Cet quipement de tlcommunication se conforme aux exigences NBTC.) Cet quipement de communication radio possde une force de champ lectromagntique conforme la norme de scurit pour lutilisation dquipement de communication radio vis--vis de la sant des personnes annonce par la Commission nationale des tlcommunications. Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte Informations sur les dplacements ariens L'utilisation d'appareils lectroniques bord des avions de ligne est laisse l'apprciation de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Ne jetez pas les batteries puises avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine La ou les batteries de ce produit ne peuvent pas tre facilement remplaces par les utilisateurs. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la batterie pourrait affecter votre droit la garantie. Si une batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez l'assistance. Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries. 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT !

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seuls les mainteneurs agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 29 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L ordinateur et ladaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible lutilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950-1). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement signifier un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Avis relatif aux batteries AVERTISSEMENT !

d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les batteries neuves et usages hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, seule la batterie fournie avec lordinateur, une batterie de rechange fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP doit tre utilise avec lordinateur. Le chargement rapide peut ne pas tre disponible pour les batteries autres que HP ou non compatibles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas ingrer la batterie, sous risque de brlure chimique. 30 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes AVERTISSEMENT ! Ce produit contient une pile bouton. Si la pile bouton est ingre, elle peut causer des brlures internes graves dans les 2 heures qui suivent et risque dentraner la mort. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si le compartiment de la batterie nest pas ferm convenablement, arrtez dutiliser le produit et gardez hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous pensez que des batteries ont pu avoir t ingres ou places lintrieur de toute partie du corps, consulter immdiatement un mdecin. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous laissez une batterie dans un environnement comportant une temprature extrmement leve, cela peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. AVERTISSEMENT ! Une batterie soumise une pression dair trs faible peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Le rglage de la commande de volume, ainsi que du balancier compensateur dautres paramtres hors de la position centrale peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Lutilisation de facteurs influenant la sortie casque/couteurs autres que ceux spcifis par le fabricant (par exemple systme dexploitation, logiciel dgalisation, microprogramme, pilote) peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, utilisez avec cet ordinateur uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 31 Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de chocs lectriques ou de dommages aux composants internes, n'utilisez pas l'embout de l'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. L'utilisation d'un aspirateur peut entraner le dpt de poussires mnagres sur le clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour supprimer la poussire, les peluches et les particules susceptibles de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches et ainsi d'liminer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque d'lectrocution, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur avec un kit de conversion de tension pour lectromnager. Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Par mesure de scurit, si la charge dalimentation lectrique du systme dpasse les capacits de la configuration spcifique, le systme peut dsactiver temporairement certains ports USB. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 33 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950-1). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement sur l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT !

L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis relatif aux batteries AVERTISSEMENT !

lithium, au pentoxyde de vanadium ou alcaline. Un risque d'explosion ou de brlure existe en cas de manipulation incorrecte du module de batteries. Le produit peut contenir un module de batteries interne au dioxyde de manganse/

AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas essayer de recharger la pile. AVERTISSEMENT ! vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas la dsassembler, l'craser, la trouer, mettre nu ses contacts ou la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. AVERTISSEMENT !

d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne pas ingrer la batterie, risque de brlure chimique. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ce produit contient une pile bouton. Si la pile bouton est ingre, elle peut causer des brlures internes graves en moins de 2 heures et peut entraner la mort. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les batteries neuves et usages hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si le compartiment de la batterie nest pas ferm convenablement, arrtez dutiliser le produit et gardez hors de porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous pensez que des batteries ont pu avoir t ingres ou places lintrieur de toute partie du corps, consulter immdiatement un mdecin. AVERTISSEMENT ! Si vous laissez une batterie dans un environnement comportant une temprature extrmement leve, cela peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. AVERTISSEMENT ! Une batterie soumise une pression dair trs faible peut entraner une explosion ou la fuite du gaz ou liquide inflammable. 34 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Icne Description Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-

les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Icne Description Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. Avis sur le ventilateur AVERTISSEMENT !

AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes loignes des parties mobiles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes loignes des hlices du ventilateur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Conservez les pices fixes hors de la trajectoire de mouvement. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Le rglage de la commande de volume, ainsi que du balancier compensateur dautres paramtres hors de la position centrale peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Lutilisation de facteurs influenant la sortie casque/couteurs autres que ceux spcifis par le fabricant (par exemple systme dexploitation, logiciel dgalisation, microprogramme, pilote) peut augmenter la tension de sortie du casque/des couteurs et par consquent le niveau de pression acoustique. Scurit des lasers Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. Avis sur le ventilateur 35 AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour une protection contre les dfauts de courant, l'quipement doit tre connect une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation du systme sur une prise secteur fournissant une connexion de masse. Tout cordon alternatif risquerait de ne pas fournir une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un produit de remplacement agr par HP Inc. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Avis pour le Brsil Danemark Finlande Norvge Sude Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'appareil ou un adaptateur de remplacement agr par HP Inc. Les rfrences de pices de rechange sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation Le jeu de cordon d'alimentation livr avec le produit est conforme aux exigences du pays dans lequel l'quipement a t achet. Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement fourni par HP Inc. ou par un revendeur agr par HP Inc. Les rfrences de pices de rechange sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) et 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe Si une antenne externe ou un systme par cble est connect(e) ce produit, assurez-vous que l'antenne ou le systme par cble est mis(e) la terre lectriquement de faon vous protger contre les surtensions et les accumulations d'lectricit statique. L'article 810 du code lectrique national (ANSI/NFPA 70) fournit des Risque de pincement 37 informations sur la mise la terre de la monture et de la structure portante, la mise la terre du fil d'entre vers un dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la taille des conducteurs de mise la terre, l'emplacement du dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la connexion aux lectrodes de terre et les exigences relatives aux lectrodes de terre. Protection contre la foudre Pour mieux protger votre produit durant un orage ou lorsqu'il reste inutilis et sans surveillance pendant une priode prolonge, dbranchez le cble de raccordement lectrique, puis l'antenne ou le systme par cble. Vous viterez ainsi que la foudre ou des surtensions n'endommagent le produit. Tableau 4-1 Mise la terre de l'antenne Rfrence Composant de mise la terre Compteur lectrique extrieur 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Systme d'lectrode de mise terre du compteur lectrique (code lectrique national, article 250, partie III) Conducteurs de mise la terre (code lectrique national, section 810.21) Dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne (code lectrique national, section 810.20) Colliers de mise la terre Collier de mise la terre Fil d'entre de l'antenne Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble Ce rappel a pour but d'attirer l'attention des installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble sur la section 820.93 du code lectrique national, qui fournit des directives pour la mise la terre et spcifie notamment que le blindage du cble coaxial doit tre connect au systme de mise la terre du btiment, aussi prs que possible du point d'entre du cble. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Avis de scurit pour la Chine 39 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Norvge et Sude : Avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips dune carte TV ATTENTION : Pour rduire les problmes de scurit potentiels, utilisez un sectionneur galvanique pour le branchement un rseau de distribution par cble.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous au site http://www.hp.com/jp/

hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie 41 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP Inc. a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Notebooks, stations de travail mobiles

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Tablettes

<= 1 minute Non applicable Non applicable Pour les ordinateurs prenant en charge un profil d'utilisation toujours sous tension, toujours connect o l'accs Internet reste actif (par exemple sur les tablettes), des modes d'alimentation basse consommation alternatifs, comme les modes d'inactivit courte ou d'inactivit prolonge (tels que dfinis dans les exigences du programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs) sont fournis. Ils consomment trs peu d'nergie (<=

10 Watts) et le cas chant, optimisent l'autonomie du produit. Ces modes alternatifs sont dynamiques. Le mode veille de l'cran est activ aprs 1 minute d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine Substances chimiques 43 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine, ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Catgorie A Classe 1 98+Efa Classe 2 Classe 3 148+Efa 198+Efa Ordinateur portable Catgorie A Catgorie B 125+Efa Catgorie C 159+Efa Catgorie D 184+Efa Catgorie B 20+Efa 26+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa Catgorie C 54,5+Efa 75,0+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions supplmentaires du produit. 2. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment la Rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine . Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre la mme que celle des donnes de consommation nergtique typique prsentes sur ltiquette. 3. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Description de la configuration Catgorie A Catgorie B Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct 44 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Type de produit Catgorie C Description de la configuration Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. Catgorie D Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. 2. 1. 2. Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 45 46 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine

(RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Comme requis par les Mthodes pour la gestion des substances dangereuses utilisation restreinte dans les produits lectriques et lectroniques de Chine Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Matires dangereuses Chrome Batterie Cbles Camra Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Bloc d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 47 Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) Nom de la pice Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil

I/O PCA

(LCD) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 48 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) CD/DVD/

/Java

() port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(RoHS) 49 Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit, ainsi que ses consommables et pices, est conforme aux dispositions de la loi India E-waste Rule 2016 relatives la rduction des substances dangereuses. Il ne contient pas de concentrations de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de diphnyles polybroms ou de polybromodiphnylthers dpassant 0,1 %

du poids et 0,01 % du poids pour le cadmium, except dans les cas o les exemptions tablies l'annexe 2 de cette loi le permettent. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Pour les ordinateurs portables, rendez-vous sur http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/

productdata/iteconotebook-o.html. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 51 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 52 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes Certifi TCO Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified. Certifi TCO 53 TCO Certified Edge Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified Edge. 54 Chapitre 5 Avis environnementaux pour les ordinateurs portables et tablettes 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-

un et les terminaux de point de vente Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Icne Description Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie 55 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP Inc. a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Ordinateurs de bureau, ordinateurs de bureau intgrs, stations de travail

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Si le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation, le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir Clients lgers

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes lorsque le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation (selon le modle) 56 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Cette dclaration s'applique tous les ordinateurs tout-en-un quips d'crans intgrs qui n'utilisent pas le rtroclairage LED. Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) (http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Substances chimiques 57 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine, ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Catgorie A Classe 1 98+Efa Classe 2 Classe 3 148+Efa 198+Efa Ordinateur portable Catgorie A Catgorie B 125+Efa Catgorie C 159+Efa Catgorie D 184+Efa Catgorie B 20+Efa 26+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa 58 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Catgorie C 54,5+Efa 75,0+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions suppmentaires du produit. 2. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment la Rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine . Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre la mme que celle des donnes de consommation nergtique typique prsentes sur ltiquette. 3. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Description de la configuration Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. 1. 2. 1. 2. Catgorie D Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 59 60 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Comme requis par les Mthodes pour la gestion des substances dangereuses utilisation restreinte dans les produits lectriques et lectroniques de Chine Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Nom de la pice Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Ventilateur Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Dissipateur thermique Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Projecteur Tlcommande X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) 61 Matires dangereuses Chrome Plomb

(Pb) Mercure Cadmium hexavalent Diphnyles

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) Nom de la pice Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Disques SSD Haut-parleurs externes Stylet Tapis tactile Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plateau de capture 3D/

plaque tournante

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 62 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB 3D /

X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) 63

(Cr(VI))

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE) X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (CR

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) AIOLiquid crystal display (LCD) panel

(for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. 64 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit, ainsi que ses consommables et pices, est conforme aux dispositions de la loi India E-waste Rule 2016 relatives la rduction des substances dangereuses. Il ne contient pas de concentrations de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de diphnyles polybroms ou de polybromodiphnylthers dpassant 0,1 %

du poids et 0,01 % du poids pour le cadmium, except dans les cas o les exemptions tablies l'annexe 2 de cette loi le permettent. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 65 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie 66 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Certifi TCO Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified. Certifi TCO 67 TCO Certified Edge Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified Edge. 68 Chapitre 6 Avis relatifs lenvironnement pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail personnelles, tout-en-un et les terminaux de point de vente Index 49, 64 A avis avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 8 WWAN pour la Thalande 27 batterie 9, 28, 30, 34, 52, 55 Brsil 3, 22, 31, 36 Canada 3, 23 clavier 32 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 16, 25, 37 cordons d'alimentation 16, 31 Core du Sud 8, 27 environnement 41 Environnement 55 ergonomie 6, 25 Japon 7, 25 Macrovision Corporation 16 matriau compos de perchlorate 52, 57 Mexique 7, 27 mise au rebut des quipements 41, 55 modem 10, 18 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 31, 35 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 51, 65 Symboles/Nombres transport arien 28 utilisation en vol 9 ventilateur 35 voyage 32 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 41, 55 avis sur la scurit des lasers 10, 29, 35 49, 64 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients avis sur le niveau du volume, casque Avis sur les priphriques sans fil Commission) 2 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN lgers et stations de travail et couteurs 31, 35 FCC (Federal Communications avis sur le niveau du volume du Commission) 21 avis, ordinateurs portables casque et des couteurs 31, 35 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour FCC (Federal Communications Singapour 8 avis, restriction d'utilisation de de Thalande 8 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 47, 61 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation avis, restriction d'utilisation de avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 41 16, 31 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 51, 65 avis de certification GS 6, 25 avis de mise la terre de cble 40 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 51, 65 avis pour la Core du Sud 8, 27 avis pour le Brsil 3, 22, 31, 36 avis pour le Canada 3 Avis pour le Canada 23 avis pour le Japon 7, 25 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 16 avis pour Tawan 8, 27 avis relatif au clavier 32 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil pour 14 le Mexique 7, 27 avis sur l'altitude 32, 39 Avis sur l'environnement 55 Avis sur l'environnement pour la avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 16, 37 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 25 avis sur les dplacements 32 avis sur les modems 10, 18 Canada 14, 20 Japon 14 Nouvelle-Zlande 15, 20 Systme amricain 12, 13, 19 avis sur les modems pour le Canada 14, 20 avis sur les modems pour le Japon avis sur les modems pour les tats-

Unis 12, 13, 19 Avis sur les priphriques sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande 27 avis sur les utilisations en vol 9 avis sur le ventilateur 35 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 32, 39 B bandes de frquences radio 5, 24 batterie 30, 34 batterie, avis 9, 28, 52, 55 Index 69 restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43, 58 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 47, 61 avis sur l'ergonomie 6, 25 avis sur la mise au rebut restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 51, 65 scurit des lasers 10, 29, 35 Singapour 8 Tawan 8, 27 batterie 52, 55 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 9, 28 batterie scelle en usine 9, 28 quipement 41, 55 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, Rglement 1275/2008 de la modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 22 N niveaux de puissance maximale 5, notice de mise la terre des cbles 24 32 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 2 P priphriques de rseau local sans fil 22 priphriques LAN sans fil 3, 23 prise en charge vocale 15, 21 R recyclage de la batterie 41, 55 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 41, 55 Commission europenne 51, 65 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 32 C Carte TV, avis de mise la terre de cble 40 Certification ENERGY STAR 42, 56 certification TCO Certified 53, 67 certification TCO Certified Edge 54, 68 D dclaration sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 15, 20 E tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 44, 58 tiquettes, conformit 1, 17 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 21 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 2 clients lgers et stations de travail 22 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 2 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 2 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 22 I Informations sur le transport arien 28 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 51 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 41, 55 70 Index

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Legal information Copyright 2022 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, Pentium, and Thunderbolt are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The microSD Logo and microSD are trademarks of SD-3C LLC. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort and the DisplayPort logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) in the United States and other countries. Miracast and Wi-Fi are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2022 Document Part Number: N03044-001 This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows is automatically updated, which is always enabled. High-speed internet and Microsoft account required. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com. If your product ships with Windows in S Mode: Windows in S Mode works exclusively with apps from the Microsoft Store within Windows. Certain default settings, features, and apps cannot be changed. Some accessories and apps that are compatible with Windows may not work (including some antivirus, PDF writers, driver utilities, and accessibility apps), and performance may vary, even if you switch out of S Mode. If you switch to Windows, you cannot switch back to S Mode. Learn more at Windows.com/SmodeFAQ. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii Processor configuration setting (select products only) Important information about processor configurations. IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. iv Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Getting started.......................................................................................................................................................................1 Finding information ...........................................................................................................................................................1 2 Components ...........................................................................................................................................................................3 Locating hardware .............................................................................................................................................................3 Locating software ..............................................................................................................................................................3 Right...................................................................................................................................................................................3 Left .....................................................................................................................................................................................5 Display................................................................................................................................................................................5 Low blue light mode (select products only) ..............................................................................................................6 Keyboard area....................................................................................................................................................................7 Touchpad....................................................................................................................................................................7 Touchpad settings..............................................................................................................................................7 Adjusting touchpad settings......................................................................................................................7 Turning on the touchpad............................................................................................................................7 Touchpad components ......................................................................................................................................8 Lights..........................................................................................................................................................................8 Button, speakers, camera, and fingerprint reader..................................................................................................10 Special keys..............................................................................................................................................................11 Action keys ...............................................................................................................................................................12 Hot keys (select products only) ...............................................................................................................................14 Bottom .............................................................................................................................................................................14 Labels...............................................................................................................................................................................15 3 Network connections ...........................................................................................................................................................18 Connecting to a wireless network ...................................................................................................................................18 Using the wireless controls......................................................................................................................................18 Wireless button ...............................................................................................................................................18 Operating system controls ..............................................................................................................................18 Connecting to a WLAN..............................................................................................................................................19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ................................................................................................20 Using eSIM (select products only)............................................................................................................................20 Using GPS (select products only).............................................................................................................................21 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)........................................................................................21 Connecting Bluetooth devices .........................................................................................................................21 Using NFC to share information (select products only)...........................................................................................21 Connecting to a wired network........................................................................................................................................22 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) ...........................................................................22 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ......................................................................................23 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) .........................................................................................23 v 4 Navigating the screen ..........................................................................................................................................................25 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................................25 Tap............................................................................................................................................................................25 Two-finger pinch zoom............................................................................................................................................26 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................26 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad)................................................................................................26 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) .............................................................................................26 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...............................................................................................27 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) .........................................................................................27 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ..................................................................................................................27 One-finger slide (touch screen) ...............................................................................................................................28 Using an optional keyboard or mouse.............................................................................................................................28 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)......................................................................................................28 5 Entertainment features .......................................................................................................................................................29 Using a camera (select products only) ............................................................................................................................29 Using audio ......................................................................................................................................................................29 Connecting speakers................................................................................................................................................29 Connecting headphones ..........................................................................................................................................29 Connecting headsets ...............................................................................................................................................30 Using sound settings ...............................................................................................................................................30 Viewing or changing sound settings ...............................................................................................................30 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings ...........................................................................30 Using video.......................................................................................................................................................................31 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ...............................................31 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only)...................................................................32 Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI.................................................................................32 Setting up HDMI audio .....................................................................................................................................33 Turning on HDMI audio.............................................................................................................................33 Turning off HDMI audio ............................................................................................................................33 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) .............................34 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ......................................34 Connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays ......................................................................................................34 Opening Intel WiDi............................................................................................................................................34 Using data transfer ..........................................................................................................................................................34 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ...........................................................................34 6 Managing power...................................................................................................................................................................36 Using Sleep and Hibernation ..........................................................................................................................................36 Initiating and exiting Sleep ......................................................................................................................................36 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) .......................................................................................37 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ......................................................................................................................37 Using the Power icon .......................................................................................................................................................38 Running on battery power...............................................................................................................................................38 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)...........................................................................................................38 Displaying battery charge........................................................................................................................................38 vi Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only).........................................................39 Conserving battery power .......................................................................................................................................39 Identifying low battery levels..................................................................................................................................39 Resolving a low battery level...................................................................................................................................39 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....................................................................40 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................................................................40 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation...................................................40 Factory-sealed battery ............................................................................................................................................40 Running on external power .............................................................................................................................................40 7 Security ................................................................................................................................................................................42 Protecting the computer..................................................................................................................................................42 Using passwords ..............................................................................................................................................................43 Setting passwords in Windows................................................................................................................................43 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ....................................................................................................................43 Managing a BIOS administrator password ..............................................................................................................44 Setting a new BIOS administrator password...................................................................................................44 Changing a BIOS administrator password .......................................................................................................45 Deleting a BIOS administrator password.........................................................................................................45 Entering a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................................46 Using DriveLock Security Options............................................................................................................................46 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only)....................................................................................46 Enabling Automatic DriveLock.................................................................................................................46 Disabling Automatic DriveLock................................................................................................................47 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password............................................................................................47 Selecting manual DriveLock ............................................................................................................................48 Setting a DriveLock master password .....................................................................................................48 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ..........................................................................49 Disabling DriveLock .........................................................................................................................................49 Entering a DriveLock password .......................................................................................................................50 Changing a DriveLock password .....................................................................................................................50 Windows Hello (select products only) .............................................................................................................................50 Using antivirus software..................................................................................................................................................51 Using firewall software....................................................................................................................................................51 Installing software updates.............................................................................................................................................51 Using HP Client Security (select products only) ..............................................................................................................52 Using HP TechPulse (select products only) .....................................................................................................................52 Using an optional security cable (select products only) .................................................................................................52 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ...........................................................................................................52 8 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................................................54 Improving performance...................................................................................................................................................54 Using Disk Defragmenter.........................................................................................................................................54 Using Disk Cleanup...................................................................................................................................................54 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ......................................................................................................54 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status...............................................................................................................55 vii Updating programs and drivers.......................................................................................................................................55 Cleaning your computer...................................................................................................................................................55 Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) .......................................................................................................55 Removing dirt and debris from your computer.......................................................................................................56 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ...........................................................................................................56 Caring for wood veneer (select products only) .......................................................................................................57 Traveling with or shipping your computer ......................................................................................................................58 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .................................................................................................................................59 Backing up information and creating recovery media ....................................................................................................59 Using Windows tools for backing up .......................................................................................................................59 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ............................59 Restoring and recovering your system............................................................................................................................59 Creating a system restore .......................................................................................................................................60 Restoring and recovery methods ............................................................................................................................60 Recovering using HP Recovery media .....................................................................................................................60 Changing the computer boot order .........................................................................................................................61 Using HP Sure Recover (select products only).........................................................................................................61 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ..............................................................................................................62 Using Computer Setup .....................................................................................................................................................62 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup .........................................................................................................62 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup........................................................................................................62 Updating the BIOS....................................................................................................................................................63 Determining the BIOS version..........................................................................................................................63 Preparing for a BIOS update ............................................................................................................................63 Downloading a BIOS update ....................................................................................................................64 Installing a BIOS update...........................................................................................................................64 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt ........................................................................................................64 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) .......................................................................................................................65 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) .....................................................................................................................65 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................66 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) .............................................................................66 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code ............................................................66 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows...................................................................................................66 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only) ...........66 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant ..............................................67 Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) ....................67 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows .............................................................................................67 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP..........................................67 Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store ......................................67 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only)........68 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows....................................................................................................68 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .........................................................................................................................68 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code....................................................................68 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .............................................................................................................69 viii Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ....................................................................69 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ...............................................................69 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) ..........70 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) .........................................................70 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI .......................................................................................70 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version..................................................70 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number.................................70 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings ..........................................................................70 12 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................................................72 Input power......................................................................................................................................................................72 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................73 13 Electrostatic discharge ......................................................................................................................................................74 14 Accessibility .......................................................................................................................................................................75 HP and accessibility .........................................................................................................................................................75 Finding the technology tools you need ...................................................................................................................75 The HP commitment ................................................................................................................................................75 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) .............................................................................76 Finding the best assistive technology .....................................................................................................................76 Assessing your needs ......................................................................................................................................76 Accessibility for HP products ...........................................................................................................................76 Standards and legislation................................................................................................................................................77 Standards.................................................................................................................................................................77 Mandate 376 EN 301 549..............................................................................................................................77 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) .................................................................................................77 Legislation and regulations .....................................................................................................................................78 Useful accessibility resources and links ..........................................................................................................................78 Organizations...........................................................................................................................................................78 Educational institutions...........................................................................................................................................78 Other disability resources........................................................................................................................................79 HP links ....................................................................................................................................................................79 Contacting support ..........................................................................................................................................................79 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................80 ix 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 18. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 51. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 25 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 59. Access HP Support Assistant appFor quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Finding information Table 1-1 Additional information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions HP support or For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Getting started 1 Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource or Contents Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar search box, and then select Support. Safety & Comfort Guide Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer To access this guide:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type device manager in the search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component

(1) microSD memory card reader (select products only) Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. Description To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. Components 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description To remove a card:

(2) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack HDMI port USB SuperSpeed 5 Gbps port

(3)

(4)

(5) USB Type-C SuperSpeed 10 Gbps port and DisplayPort output Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charges small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode.

(6) Battery light When AC power is connected:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and (for select products) charges small devices (such as a smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. and Connects a DisplayPort device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing display output. White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90 percent. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging. 4 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(7) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it might not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. USB SuperSpeed 5 Gbps port with HP Sleep and Charge Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the computer is off.

(3) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external device. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Left 5 Low blue light mode (select products only) Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at night or for reading. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description WLAN antennas*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Ambient light sensor (select products only) Adjust the brightness of the display, depending on the ambient light. Internal microphones Record sound.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Camera light Camera privacy cover On: The camera is in use. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. If you have both front-facing and rear-facing cameras, when NOTE:

one camera lens is revealed and ready to use, the other is concealed. Allow(s) you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 29. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows,

(6) Camera(s) (select products only) 6 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 50. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Documentation. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. NOTE: The keyboard, including the function keys and power button (select products only), is disabled in stand, tent, and tablet modes. To enable the keyboard, including the power button, change to the clamshell mode. Touchpad Touchpad settings The touchpad settings and components are described here. You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Choose a setting. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type touchpad settings in the search box, and then press enter. 2. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Keyboard area 7 Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone

(1)

(2)

(3) Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 25. Left touchpad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Right touchpad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. 8 Chapter 2 Components

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Table 2-5 Lights and their descriptions Component Description Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. Mute light Microphone mute light Power light On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Microphone is off. Off: Microphone is on. On: The computer is on. Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power saving state that uses the least amount of power. Camera light (select products only) On: The camera is in use. Fn lock light On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys

(select products only) on page 14. Lights 9 Button, speakers, camera, and fingerprint reader Fingerprint readers can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard. IMPORTANT: To verify that your computer supports fingerprint reader sign-in, select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type Sign-in options in the search box, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If Fingerprint reader is not listed as an option, then your notebook does not include a fingerprint reader. Table 2-6 Button, speakers, camera, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speakers Power button Description Produce sound. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. 10 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-6 Button, speakers, camera, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued) Component Description If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon and then, depending on your product, select Power and sleep settings or Power Options. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera (select products only) on page 29. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello (select products only) on page 50. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Touch your finger to the fingerprint reader. See Windows Hello (select products only) on page 50 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader.

(3) Camera (select products only)

(4) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. Special keys 11 Table 2-7 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Power button Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another key. Such key combinations are called hot keys. See Hot keys (select products only) on page 14. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. See Action keys on page 12. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, use the Power icon. Right-click the Power icon and then, depending on your product, select Power and sleep settings or Power Options. Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key. 12 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. On select products, helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: This feature is available only on select products. If the feature is not available on your computer, a message is displayed when you press this key. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes the microphone. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Executes frequently used tasks. Some tasks might not be available on all products. Opens an application, file, or website Enters frequently used text into a permanent clipboard Action keys 13 Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Ability to change system profiles Ability to change system properties Executes user-defined key sequences NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. On select products only, you can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys (select products only) A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. Press the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. To use a hot key:

Table 2-9 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description C E R S W Turns on scroll lock. Turns on the insert function. Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Bottom Use the illustration and table to identify the bottom component. 14 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-10 Bottom component and its description Component Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Labels 15 Table 2-11 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Serial number Product ID HP product name Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) HP product name Warranty period Product ID 16 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-13 Service label components (continued) Component

(4) Serial number Regulatory labelsProvide regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 17 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer might have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Depending on your computer model, you have several methods to access operating system controls:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Network and Sharing Center. or 18 Chapter 3 Network connections On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Network and Internet settings. or Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 1. 2. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select the right arrow icon next to the Wi-Fi button to see the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, if you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to, follow one of these methods:

1. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings (select products only) or Network and Internet settings. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. 2. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select WiFi, and then select Manage known networks. 3. Select Set up a new connection or network. Select the Add network button. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. or or or Connecting to a WLAN 19 After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select or right-click (select products only) the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings or Network and Internet settings (select products only). Under the Network & Internet section or the Network and Internet settings (select products only), select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using eSIM (select products only) Your computer might be equipped with an eSIM. An eSIM is a programmable version of the commonly used SIM that you can use to download different profiles from selected carriers. An eSIM lets you connect to the internet over a cellular data connection. With an eSIM, you do not need to get a SIM card from your mobile operator, and you can quickly switch between mobile operators and data plans. For example, you might have one cellular data plan for work and a different plan with another mobile operator for personal use. If you travel, you can connect in more places by finding mobile operators with plans in that area. You can implement eSIMs in two ways:

The eSIM chip can be embedded (eUICC). The notebook then operates as a dual SIM, one as eUICC and the second as standard micro or nano SIM card on a SIM card tray. Only one SIM can be active at a time. A removable physical eSIM is placed on a SIM card tray like a standard micro or nano SIM card, but the eSIM is not limited to a single carrier (physical blank eSIM). You must add an eSIM profile to connect to the internet using cellular data. To add a profile, manage SIM profiles, and learn how to use an eSIM, go to https://www.support.microsoft.com , and type Use an eSIM in the search bar. 20 Chapter 3 Network connections Using GPS (select products only) Your computer might be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, be sure that location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type location in the search box, and then select Location privacy settings. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Connecting Bluetooth devices 1. 2. 3. Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type bluetooth in the search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device (select products only) or Add device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. 4. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. Using NFC to share information (select products only) Your computer supports Near Field Communication (NFC), which allows you to wirelessly share information between two NFC-enabled devices. Information is transferred from the tapping area (antenna) of one device to another. With NFC and supported apps, you can share websites, transfer contact information, transfer payments, and print on NFC-enabled printers. NOTE: To locate the tapping area on your computer, see Components on page 3. Using GPS (select products only) 21 Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type wireless in the search box, and 1. Confirm that the NFC function is enabled. then select Turn wireless devices on or off. Confirm that the selection for NFC is On. 2. Tap the NFC tapping area with an NFC-enabled device. You might hear a sound when the devices connect. NOTE: To find the location of the antenna on the other NFC device, see your device instructions. 3. Follow any on-screen instructions to continue. Connecting to a wired network Select products might allow a local area network (LAN) connection, which uses a network cable. The cable is sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection might be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 23. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion product. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 22 Chapter 3 Network connections

Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. To turn on and customize HP LAN-Wireless Protection:

1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and before the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching, LAN/WWAN Auto Switching, or both to turn off WLAN connections, WWAN connections, or both when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through a network adapter. This address is enabled by default. To customize MAC Address Pass Through:

Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) 23 1. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 24 Chapter 3 Network connections Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. 4 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, follow these steps, depending on your computer:

Select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad.

- or -

Tap Select Start, select Settings, select Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Navigating the screen 25 Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. fingers apart. Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. 26 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices or Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices or Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices or Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) 27 Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices or Bluetooth & devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. You can display the on-screen keyboard in several ways:

1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type on-screen keyboard in the search box, and then select On-Screen Keyboard. or 2. Press the Windows key +ctrl+o. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. 28 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Cameras can be front facing or rear facing. To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type camera in the search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 42 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio Connecting speakers You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 33. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Entertainment features 29 Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting headsets You can connect a headset to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. A stand-alone microphone can be plugged into a USB port. See your manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type HP Documentation in the search box, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, and then select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type control panel in the search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. 30 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) Connect a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f1 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Using video 31 Each time you press f1 the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the instructions. NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. NOTE: HDMI port shape can vary by product. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f1 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. 32 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Each time you press f1 the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of the NOTE:

external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, select System, and then select Display. Under Scale & layout, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio Use these instructions to set up HDMI audio. Turning on HDMI audio After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio. Depending on your computer's configuration, you will follow one of these procedures. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Select Set Default, and then select OK. 1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Sound Turning off HDMI audio Use these instructions to return the audio stream to the computer speakers. Depending on your computer's configuration, you will follow one of these procedures. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Sound 1. 2. 3. or 1. 2. 3. or Settings. 2. Select More Sound Settings. 3. Select Digital Audio (HDMI). 4. Select Set Default, and then select OK. On the Playback tab, select Speakers. Select Set Default, and then select OK. Settings. 2. Select More Sound Settings. 3. Select Speakers. 4. Select Set Default, and then select OK. Setting up HDMI audio 33 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) Follow these steps to discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps. NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow these steps. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type project in the search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. Connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays Follow these steps to connect to Intel WiDi certified displays. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type project in the search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Opening Intel WiDi Follow these steps to open Intel WiDi. then select Intel WiDi. Using data transfer Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type Intel WiDi in the search box, and Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. 34 Chapter 5 Entertainment features NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) 35 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 36. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 37. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the touchpad (select products only). 36 Chapter 6 Managing power When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type power in the search box, and then select Choose a power plan. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. IMPORTANT:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. 1. Save your work and close all open programs. Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) 37 2. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To view power settings, right-click the Power icon

, and then, depending on your product, select Power and sleep settings or Power options. Different power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. 38 Chapter 6 Managing power Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) Follow these steps to access battery information. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon on page 38. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) 39 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software 40 Chapter 6 Managing power When updating the system BIOS When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 41 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Unauthorized use of the computer Computer risk Security feature HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (touchpad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. 42 Chapter 7 Security Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Function Administrator password*

Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. User password*

Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Using passwords 43 Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 44 Chapter 7 Security Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 2. 3. 2. 3. Changing a BIOS administrator password 45 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drives of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 46. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 48. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 49. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) You must set a BIOS administrator password before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. a. b. a. b. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. 46 Chapter 7 Security Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. a. b. a. b. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Disabling Automatic DriveLock 47 Selecting manual DriveLock To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, you must set a master password, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. IMPORTANT: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, you can access the hard drive only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. a. b. a. b. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 49. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. 48 Chapter 7 Security Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling DriveLock To disable DriveLock, follow these steps. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn off the computer. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password 49 a. b. a. b. a. b. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll your fingerprint and your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Password, and then select Add. Under Windows Hello Fingerprint or Windows Hello Face, select Set up. or Under Facial recognition (Windows Hello) or Fingerprint recognition (Windows Hello), select Set up. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 50 Chapter 7 Security 4. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. Using antivirus software 51 To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security (select products only) or Windows Update. Follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. You can access this software through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP TechPulse (select products only) HP TechPulse is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP TechPulse helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hpdaas.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. To use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. 52 Chapter 7 Security The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

Near the bottom of the touchpad On the right side of the keyboard On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) 53 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

Connect the computer to AC power. 1. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type defragment in the search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup To run Disk Cleanup:

Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type disk in the search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions. You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. 54 Chapter 8 Maintenance A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. To update your programs and drivers, follow these steps. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. 2. 3. Under My notebook, select Updates. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you can clean all computer surfaces. 1. Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start menu, and then select HP Easy Clean. Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar. or or Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status 55 Select Start, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile. 2. Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 56 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 56 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 57. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 56 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 56, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 57, or both, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

56 Chapter 8 Maintenance 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. 2. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal. Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois. Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone, turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents. Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time. If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth. Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood. Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood. See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 56 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 56 for sanitizing guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Caring for wood veneer (select products only) 57 Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. 58 Chapter 8 Maintenance 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For details:

Go to http://www.hp.com, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that matches the type of computer that you have. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 60 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. Backing up, restoring, and recovering 59 HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 60. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. Run a Microsoft System Restore. 1. 2. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before you recycle it. 3. Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media on page 60. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select All apps (select products only), select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. Recovering using HP Recovery media You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 59. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 60 to restore your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process. 60 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. button, and then select f9. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed recovery software. Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

Latest version of the operating system Platform-specific device drivers Software applications, in the case of a custom image To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation. Changing the computer boot order 61 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps. 62 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 62. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. NOTE: On select products, the selections might display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Determining the BIOS version Updated versions of the BIOS might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. If you are already in Windows, you can access BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) by pressing fn+esc (select products only). Or you can use Computer Setup. Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 62. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 63. Preparing for a BIOS update Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Updating the BIOS 63 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Downloading a BIOS update After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Installing a BIOS update BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type file in the search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps. 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 64 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start TPM BIOS settings (select products only) TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation or usage of TPM that violates the previously mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

Start Computer Setup. See Using Computer Setup on page 62. 1. 2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. Advanced users can customize the default configuration. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 65 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, a firmware feature. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 67. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated for select component tests. For interactive tests, such as keyboard, mouse, or audio and video palette, you must perform troubleshooting steps before you can receive a failure ID. You have several options after you receive a failure ID:

Select Next to open the Event Automation Service (EAS) page, where you can log the case. Scan the QR code with your mobile device, which takes you to the EAS page, where you can log the or case. or Select the box next to the 24-digit failure ID to copy your failure code and send it to support. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Support Assistant or the Start menu. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 66 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support Assistant. 1. Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, type support in the search box, and then select HP Support Assistant. or Select the question mark icon (select products only) in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes (select products only) or Fixes & Diagnostics. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only) After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu. Select the Start button, and then select All apps (select products only). Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select the specific Windows diagnostics version to download to your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant 67 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop. or Select the Search icon (select products only) in the taskbar, and then type Microsoft Store. Enter HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box. Follow the on-screen directions. The tool downloads to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool downloads to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. For some products, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create NOTE:

the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 69. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

68 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the failure ID code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 1. 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 69. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. 1. 2. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 69 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several customizations. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 70 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings 71 12 Specifications Input power When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 2.5 A / 15 V dc @2 A 30 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc

@ 5 A / 5 V dc USB-A port @ 2 A 100 W USB-C + 10 W USB-A 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 72 Chapter 12 Specifications Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W 20 V dc @ 14 A 280 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Metric U.S. Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating 20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 73 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 74 Chapter 13 Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 76. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. in an accessible form. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Accessibility 75 Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable and available in your country or region, that are included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select Office of Aging and Accessibility. HP computers: For Windows products, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the appropriate operating system in the results. HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select Monitors or Accessories. If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 79. 76 Chapter 14 Accessibility Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows and Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) navigability) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Standards and legislation 77 Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Australia Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age related limitations. California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program 78 Chapter 14 Accessibility Other disability resources Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program ILO Global Business and Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable HP links HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Other disability resources 79 Index A accessibility 75, 76, 78, 79 accessibility needs assessment 76 action keys 12 identifying 12 keyboard backlight 13 mute 13 privacy screen 13 screen brightness 13 speaker volume 13 switch screen image 13 using 12 wireless 13 administrator password 43 airplane mode key 18 ambient light sensor, identifying 6 antivirus software 51 assistive technology (AT) AT (assistive technology) finding 76 purpose 75 finding 76 purpose 75 audio 29 adjusting volume 13 HDMI 33 headphones 29 headsets 30 sound settings 30 speakers 29 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 4 Automatic Drivelock selecting 46 Automatic DriveLock disabling 47 enabling 46 Automatic DriveLock password entering 47 B backup, creating 59 backups 59 battery conserving power 39 discharging 39 80 Index factory-sealed 40 finding information 39 low battery levels 39 resolving low battery level 39, 40 battery charge 38 battery information, finding 39 battery light 4 battery power 38 BIOS determining version 63 downloading an update 63, 64 updating 63 Bluetooth device 18, 21 Bluetooth label 15 boot order changing using the f9 prompt 64 boot order, changing 61 buttons left touchpad 8 power 10, 12 right touchpad 8 C camera 6, 11 identifying 6, 11 using 29 camera light, identifying 6, 9 camera privacy cover using 29 camera privacy cover, identifying 6 caps lock light, identifying 9 caring for your computer 55 cleaning your computer 55 caring for wood veneer 57 disinfecting 56 HP Easy Clean 55 removing dirt and debris 56 components bottom 14 display 5, 6 keyboard area 7 left side 5 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 44-46 navigating and selecting 62 restoring factory settings 62 starting 62 connecting to a WLAN 19 connector, power 5 corporate WLAN connection 19 critical battery level 39 customer support, accessibility 79 data transfer 34 Disk Cleanup software 54 Disk Defragmenter software 54 display components 5, 6 display states 32 DisplayPort, identifying USB Type-

C 4 DriveLock description 48 disabling 49 enabling 49 changing 50 DriveLock password changing 50 entering 50 setting 48 DriveLock master password DriveLock Security Options 46 electrostatic discharge 74 esc key, identifying 12 eSIM 20 external power, using 40 D E F factory-sealed battery 40 fingerprint reader 52 fingerprint reader, identifying 11 fingerprints, registering 50 firewall software 51 fn key, identifying 12 fn lock light, identifying 9 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 27 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 27 input power 72 internal microphones, identifying 6 International Association of microphone mute light, identifying 9 microSD memory card reader, Accessibility Professionals 76 identifying 3 gesture 27 GPS 21 G H hardware, locating 3 HDMI audio, configuring 33 HDMI port connecting 32 HDMI port, identifying 4 headphones, connecting 29 headsets, connecting 30 Hibernation exiting 37 initiated during critical battery level 39 initiating 37 high-definition devices, connecting 32, 34 hot keys break 14 insert 14 microphone mute 13 pause 14 programming query 14 scroll lock 14 using 14 HP 3D DriveGuard 54 HP Assistive Policy 75 HP Client Security 52 HP Fast Charge 38 HP LAN-Wireless Protection 23 HP MAC Address Pass Through 23 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics downloading 69 failure ID code 68 starting 69 using 68 Windows accessing 66, 67 downloading 67 failure ID code 66 installing 68 using 66 HP Recovery media recovery 60 HP resources 1 HP Sure Recover 61 HP TechPulse 52 I initiating Sleep and Hibernation 36 jacks J K audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 4 keyboard and optional mouse using 28 keyboard backlight action key 13 keys action 12 esc 12 fn 12 Windows 12 L labels Bluetooth 15 regulatory 15 serial number 15 service 15 wireless certification 15 WLAN 15 left side components 5 lights AC adapter and battery 4 battery 4 camera 6, 9 caps lock 9 fn lock 9 microphone mute 9 power 9 privacy key 9 lights, mute 9 low battery level 39 low blue light mode 6 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 54 Disk Defragmenter 54 updating programs and drivers 55 managing power 36 memory card reader, identifying 3 microphone mute key, identifying 13 Miracast 34 mute light, identifying 9 mute volume action key 13 NFC 21 N O P one-finger slide touch screen gesture 28 operating environment 73 passwords administrator 43 BIOS administrator 44-46 user 43 ports HDMI 4, 32 USB SuperSpeed 4 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 5 USB Type-C 34 USB Type-C SuperSpeed 4 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort 31 power battery 38 external 40 power button, identifying 10, 12 power connector identifying 5 power icon, using 38 power lights 9 power settings, using 38 precision touchpad using 25 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 27 four-finger tap 27 three-finger swipe 27 three-finger tap 26 two-finger slide 26 two-finger tap 26 privacy key light 9 privacy screen action key, identifying 13 product name and number, computer 15 Index 81 public WLAN connection 19 recovery 59 discs 60 media 60 USB flash drive 60 recovery media 59 creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 59 creating using Windows tools 59 regulatory information regulatory label 15 wireless certification labels 15 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics T UEFI settings customizing 70 using 70 resources, accessibility 78 restoring 59 restoring and recovery methods 60 right side components 3 R S screen brightness action keys 13 Section 508 accessibility standards 77 security cable 52 security cable slot, identifying 5 serial number, computer 15 service labels, locating 15 setup utility navigating and selecting 62 restoring factory settings 62 shipping the computer 58 shutdown 37 Sleep exiting 36 initiating 36 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 36 slots software security cable 5 antivirus 51 Disk Cleanup 54 Disk Defragmenter 54 firewall 51 speaker volume action keys 13 speakers connecting 29 speakers, identifying 10 special keys, using 11 standards and legislation, accessibility 77 SuperSpeed port and DisplayPort connector, connecting USB Type-

C 31 Sure Start using 65 switch screen image action key 13 system restore 60 system restore point, creating 59 V updating programs and drivers 55 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 5 USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 31, 34 USB Type-C SuperSpeed port, identifying 4 user password 43 using passwords 43 using the keyboard and optional mouse 28 using the touchpad 25 three-finger tap touchpad volume tap touchpad and touch screen three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 25 gesture 27 gesture 26 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 28 touchpad settings 7 using 25 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 25 two-finger pinch zoom 26 touchpad buttons identifying 8 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 27 four-finger tap 27 three-finger swipe 27 three-finger tap 26 two-finger slide 26 two-finger tap 26 touchpad zone, identifying 8 TPM settings 65 transfer data 34 traveling with the computer 15, 58 turning off the computer 37 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 26 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 26 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 26 vents, identifying 5, 15 video 31 DisplayPort device 31 HDMI port 32 USB Type-C 31 wireless displays 34 adjusting 13 mute 13 W Windows backup 59 recovery media 59 system restore point 59 Windows Hello using 50 Windows key, identifying 12 Windows tools, using 59 wireless action key 13 wireless antennas, identifying 6 wireless button 18 wireless certification label 15 wireless controls button 18 operating system 18 wireless key 18 wireless light 18 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 19 corporate WLAN connection 19 functional range 19 public WLAN connection 19 WLAN antennas, identifying 6 WLAN device 15 WLAN label 15 WWAN device 18, 20 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 51 sound See audio U sound settings, using 30 unresponsive system 37 82 Index

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6086996.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case RTL8852BE Users Manual

(Realtek RTL8852BE) 11ax RTL8852BE Combo module Users Manual Preliminary Version 2021/05/13 Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel.: +886-3-578-0211. Fax: +886-3-577-6047 www.realtek.com RTL8852BE Users Manual CONTENT ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................................................... 3 OPERATING ............................................................................................................................................ 3 STORAGE ................................................................................................................................................ 3 MTBF CACULATION .............................................................................................................................. 3 WARNING .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement ...................... 4 INDUSTRY CANADA STATEMENT ......................................................................................................... 13 NCC .................................................................................................... 13 RTL8852BE Users Manual ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Operating Temperature: -20C to +70 C Relative Humidity:

5-90% (non-condensing) Storage Temperature:

-40C to +80C (non-operating) Relevant Humidity:

5-95% (non-condensing) MTBF caculation Over 150,000hours RTL8852BE Users Manual Warning Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. This device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E, Section RTL8852BE Users Manual 15.407 of the FCC Rules. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. The SAR test is according to KDB 616217 for test requirements. The maximum output power is reduced by software to perform SAR evaluation as application. The SAR evaluation is according to KDB 616217, and the module approach distance restriction is 5 mm for notebook, 10 mm for tablet. When this module is installed into the host as portable configuration, only PIFA Antenna as described in this use manual is applicable. When other antenna type is used, it is required for a separate reassessment through a class II permissive change application or new certification This module is intended for OEM integrators only. Per FCC KDB 996369 D03 OEM Manual v01 guidance, the following conditions must be strictly followed when using this certified module:

KDB 996369 D03 OEM Manual v01 rule sections:

2.2 List of applicable FCC rules This module has been tested for compliance to FCC Part 15 2.3 Summarize the specific operational use conditions The module is tested for standalone mobile RF exposure use condition. Any other usage conditions such as co-location with other transmitter(s) or being used in a portable condition will need a separate reassessment through a RTL8852BE Users Manual class II permissive change application or new certification. 2.4 Limited module procedures Not applicable. 2.5 Trace antenna designs Not applicable. 2.6 RF exposure considerations This equipment complies with FCC mobile radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator &

your body. If the module is installed in a portable host, a separate SAR evaluation is required to confirm compliance with relevant FCC portable RF exposure rules. 2.7 Antennas The following antennas have been certified for use with this module; antennas of the same type with equal or lower gain may also be used with this module. The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm can be maintained between the antenna and users. 2.8 Label and compliance information The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following:

Contains FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE. The grantee's FCC ID can be used only when all FCC compliance requirements are met. 2.9 Information on test modes and additional testing requirements This transmitter is tested in a standalone mobile RF exposure condition and any co-located or simultaneous transmission with other transmitter(s) or portable use will require a separate class II permissive change re-evaluation RTL8852BE Users Manual or new certification. 2.10 Additional testing, Part 15 Subpart B disclaimer This transmitter module is tested as a subsystem and its certification does not cover the FCC Part 15 Subpart B (unintentional radiator) rule requirement applicable to the final host. The final host will still need to be reassessed for compliance to this portion of rule requirements if applicable. As long as all conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC authorization. Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. OEM/Host manufacturer responsibilities OEM/Host manufacturers are ultimately responsible for the compliance of the Host and Module. The final product must be reassessed against all the essential requirements of the FCC rule such as FCC Part 15 Subpart B before it can be placed on the US market. This includes reassessing the transmitter module for compliance with the Radio and EMF essential requirements of the FCC rules. This module must not be incorporated into any other device or system without retesting for compliance as multi-radio and combined equipment RTL8852BE Users Manual This modular is approved for indoor Client Device only, and its operation will not be allowed on cars, trains, boats, and aircraft, except that low power indoor devices and associated client devices can operate on large aircraft above 10,000 feet. Industry Canada statement:

This device complies with ISEDs licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d ISED applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with greater than 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis plus de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour RTL8852BE Users Manual les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. The SAR evaluation is according to KDB 616217, and the module approach distance restriction is 5 mm for notebook, 10 mm for tablet. L'valuation SAR est conforme KDB 616217, et la restriction de distance d'approche du module est de 5 mm pour le portable, 10 mm pour la tablette. When this module is installed into the host as portable configuration, only PIFA Antenna as described in this use manual is applicable. When other antenna type is used, it is required for a separate reassessment through a class II permissive change application or new certification Lorsque ce module est install dans l'hte en tant que configuration portable, seule l'antenne PIFA telle que dcrite dans ce manuel d'utilisation est applicable. Lorsqu'un autre type d'antenne est utilis, il est requis pour une rvaluation distincte via une demande de changement permissif de classe II ou une nouvelle certification This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use) 1) The antenna must be installed and operated with greater than 20cm between the antenna and users, and 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes: (Pour utilisation de dispositif module) 1) L'antenne doit tre install et exploit avec plus de 20 cm entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs, et 2) Le module metteur peut ne pas tre complant avec un autre metteur ou antenne. RTL8852BE Users Manual Tant que les 2 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. IMPORTANT NOTE:

In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the Canada authorization is no longer considered valid and the IC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate Canada authorization. NOTE IMPORTANTE:

Dans le cas o ces conditions ne peuvent tre satisfaites (par exemple pour certaines configurations d'ordinateur portable ou de certaines co-localisation avec un autre metteur), l'autorisation du Canada n'est plus considr comme valide et l'ID IC ne peut pas tre utilis sur le produit final. Dans ces circonstances, l'intgrateur OEM sera charg de rvaluer le produit final (y compris l'metteur) et l'obtention d'une autorisation distincte au Canada. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed and operated with greater than 20cm between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC:

6317A-RTL8852BE. Plaque signaltique du produit final Ce module metteur est autoris uniquement pour une utilisation dans un appareil o lantenne peut tre installe et utilise plus de 20 cm entre lantenne et les utilisateurs. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante: "Contient des IC: 6317A-RTL8852BE ". End Product Labeling The product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC: 6317A-RTL8852BE. RTL8852BE Users Manual Plaque signaltique du produit final L'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante: "Contient des IC: 6317A-RTL8852BE ". Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Manuel d'information l'utilisateur final L'intgrateur OEM doit tre conscient de ne pas fournir des informations l'utilisateur final quant la faon d'installer ou de supprimer ce module RF dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit final qui intgre ce module. Le manuel de l'utilisateur final doit inclure toutes les informations rglementaires requises et avertissements comme indiqu dans ce manuel. Caution :

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) for devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit;

(iii) for devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate;

(iv) where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna models(s), and worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in section 6.2.2.3 shall be clearly indicated. RTL8852BE Users Manual Avertissement:

Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e;

(iii) pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie, selon le cas;

(iv) lorsquil y a lieu, les types dantennes (sil y en a plusieurs), les numros de modle de lantenne et les pires angles dinclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme lexigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque dlvation, nonce la section 6.2.2.3, doivent tre clairement indiqus This radio transmitter [IC: 6317A-RTL8852BE] has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le prsent metteur radio [IC: 6317A-RTL8852BE] a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. RTL8852BE Users Manual NCC Statement 1. 2. (

) 1. 2. XXXyyyLPDzzzz-x NCC LOGO Japan Statement Host system must be labeled with "Contains MIC ID:xxxxxx, MIC ID displayed on label. HK Statement 5.15 5.35 GHz shall be restricted to indoor operations. This device complies with Directive 2014/53/EU and UK Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 SI RTL8852BE Users Manual 2017/1206. issued by the Commission of the European Community.

- Declaration of Conformity RTL8852BE Users Manual The frequency and maximum transmitted power in EU are listed as belows, For UK 5725~5825

- WLAN 5GHz:

Operations in the 5.15-5.35GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. RTL8852BE Users Manual Installing the Wireless PCIe NGFF2230 module Hardware Installing PCIe NGFF2230 module to PCIe NGFF2230 connector and connect two external Wi-Fi antennas on I-PEX connectors. RTL8852BE Users Manual Un-installing the Wireless PCIe NGFF2230 module Hardware Remove 2 external Wi-Fi Antennas from the Wireless PCIe NGFF2230 module board and remove the Wireless PCIe NGFF2230 module board from PCIe NGFF2230 connector port RTL8852BE Users Manual Installing the WLAN PCIe & Bluetooth USB NGFF2230 module Software Before you proceed with the installation, please notice following descriptions. Note1: The following installation was operated under Windows 7. Note2: If you have installed the WLAN driver & utility before, please uninstall the old version first. A. Execute the setup.exe, Click Next to process the installation B. Select I accept the terms in license agreement and click Next to process the installation RTL8852BE Users Manual C. Click Next button. D. Select Complete and click Next button. RTL8852BE Users Manual E. Click Install button. F. Click Finish button. RTL8852BE Users Manual G. Please click to continue. H. Please click to continue. RTL8852BE Users Manual I. Please click to start installation. J. Please click to finish the installation. Un-installing the Wireless PCIe NGFF2230 module Software A. Uninstall the RTL8852BE WLAN Driver from Start Control Panel Programs Please select items as below and click Uninstall to remove RTL8852BE WLAN, BT driver and MP UI.

Label & Label Location for HP Model name: TPN-W155 Laptop bottom Contains Realtek Radio Model RTL8852BE Contains FCC ID: B94- RTL8852BER Contains IC: 6317A- RTL8852BE

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER This is to request a Class II permissive change for module approval FCC ID:

B94-RTL8852BER, granted on 10/20/2022. The intention of this change is to address the RF exposure compliance for U-NII-4 band in the host platform HP Notebook PC, TPN-W155. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Except for the change above, the design, hardware and implementation are exactly same with original. Sincerely yours, Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER To Whom It May Concern, Date: November 29, 2022 Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. Test Setup Photos It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, _______________________ Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States To Whom It May Concern:

Date October 5, 2022 We, HP Inc., hereby submit a C2PC equipment authorization filing for our product, 11ax RTL8852BE Combo module FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER, newly added U-NII-4 and U-

NII-3 &-4 span channels capability per KDB 291074 D01. The original submitted test reports (RFBBUI-WTW-P21040655-7; SFBBUI-WTW-P21040655-1; MFBBUI-WTW-

P21040655) under Realtek Semiconductor Corp. FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE granted date 09/06/2022 are submitted to demonstrate compliance for FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER compliance and we will take full responsibility for the test data filed. Best Regards, ______________________ Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469 Page 1 of 1

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 Date October 5, 2022 Subject: Authorization To Whom It May Concern:

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. is the original grantee of FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE, grant date: 09/06/2022. FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE was certified as single module approval. We, Realtek Semiconductor Corp., are acknowledged that HP Inc. (Grantee Code B94) will submit the Test reports (RFBBUI-WTW-P21040655-7;

SFBBUI-WTW-P21040655-1; MFBBUI-WTW-P21040655) of FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE in demonstrating FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER compliance for the new U-NII-4 and U-NII-3 &-4 span channels. This letter is served as the written authorization from Realtek Semiconductor Corp. to HP Inc. to submit applicable test reports under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE, granted on 09/06/2022 in supporting FCC equipment authorization procedure per KDB 291074 D01. Best Regards, ______________________ Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com Page 1 of 1

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States October 5, 2022 Attestation We, HP Inc., attest that FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER complies with device protocol requirements and operational restrictions for Client Devices. 1) This device will not directly connect to another client device. 2) This device will only associate and connect with an indoor Access Point (AP) or indoor Subordinate. 3) This device will always be under the control of an indoor AP. However, there may exist situations where the client may transmit brief messages, prior to being under the control of an AP, to join an AP network. But these brief messages will only occur if the client has detected a signal confirming that an AP is operating on a particular channel. These brief messages will have a time-out mechanism if the client does not receive a response from an AP. __________________ Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469

Date: December 30, 2021 3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States To whom it may concern, Please be notified that HP Inc. has designated Sporton International Inc. as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. All acts carried out by Sporton International Inc. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certify that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER Sincerely yours, Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2 Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: December 29, 2021 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 To whom it may concern, This letter grants authorization for representatives of HP Inc.to apply to the FCC for a change in identification as specified under 47CFR section 2.933 of the FCC rules. This authorization applies to 11ax RTL8852BE Combo module, FCC ID: TX2-RTL8852BE, original grant date is 08/13/2021. We are aware that HP Inc. intends to market the above referred product under FCC ID: B94-RTL8852BER. The original test results continue to be representative of and applicable to the equipment bearing the changed identification. Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States Date: December 30, 2021 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 To whom it may concern, This Change of Identification request applies for a new FCC ID as established in 47CFR 2.933(b) for a currently approved device. This application by HP Inc. will establish a new FCC ID:

B94-RTL8852BER under HP Inc. grantee code for purpose of marketing. The original grant to Realtek Semiconductor Corp. will remain in effect. Per 2.933(b) 1. The original identification is TX2-RTL8852BE. 2. The original grant date is 08/13/2021 3. The equipment is electrically identical. Only the trade name and FCC ID number are different. 4. The original test results are applicable and representative of this changed device. The following files are electronically submitted as attachments:

Cover Letter Sincerely yours, Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469 External Photos FCC ID label format and location

Authorization on Behalf of HP Inc. For the US Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology and Other FCC Programs and Offices 1. I, Richard P Tarsio, am on the Worldwide Technical Regulations staff of HP Inc. (HP) and Applicant/Grantee Contact of Record for HP Inc. together with its subsidiaries and affiliates worldwide (collectively, HP) for HPs dealings with the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC). I am duly authorized by HP Inc. to make this Authorization on HP Inc.s behalf. 2. This Authorization will designate the person named below to act on my behalf and HP Inc.s behalf as authorized agent and representative, until further notice, with the additional power to designate one or more third party agents for HP Inc. with regard to particular matters and applications. All acts carried out and requests made by this named representative relating to any matter before the FCC, including requests for confidentiality, shall have the same effect as mine. Name:

Title:

Address:

Telephone:

E-mail:

Rong-Chiao Liang Regulatory Program Manager HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F, No. 66 Jingmao 2nd Rd NanGang District Taipei, Taiwan 11568 866 2 37892469 frances.liang@hp.com 3. Questions about the scope and effect of this Authorization should be addressed as follows:

4. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct, and that this Authorization was executed at Fort Collins, Colorado on the date indicated below my signature. Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations 3390 East Harmony Road, MS 66 Fort Collins, CO 80528 970 898 8713 Telephone richard.tarsio@hp.com ____________________________ Signature Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations HP Inc. Date: 30 November 2021